Challenger (2014) - Car DODGE - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Challenger (2014) DODGE

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationoffeaturesandequipmentthatareeitherstandardoroptionalon thisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludeadescriptionof featuresandequipmentthatarenolongeravailableorwere notorderedonthisvehicle.Pleasedisregardanyfeatures andequipmentdescribedinthismanualthatarenotonthis vehicle.

ChryslerGroupLLCreservestherighttomakechangesin designandspecifications,and/ormakeadditionstoorimprovementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligation uponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Copyright©2013ChryslerGroupLLC

SECTION PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION. 3
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE....9
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE....103
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL. 205
5 STARTINGANDOPERATING....285
6 WHATODOINEMERGENCIES....397
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE. 433
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES. 495
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE. 505
10 INDEX....5 1 5

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■INTRODUCTION....4

■HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....4

■WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....6

■VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....6

■VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS....7

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should bestored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERMITTENT EXTERIOR BILB FAILURE HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED BEAT LOW DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PESALS ELECTRONIC SPEED/CONTROL ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM / BRAKE ASIST SYSTEM ESP BAS FUEL REAR WINDOW INTERMITTENT WIPER WINDSHIELD WISHER MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE (POWER OUTLET) UPPER AND LOWER AIR OUTLET HEATED BEAT HIGH WINDOW UFT TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR HILL/DESCENT CONTROL BRAKE FUEL FILL BOE REAR WINDOW WASHER WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUSE LEVEL DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR OUTLET REOCULATION CONVERTILE 4 WINDOWN DOWN ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL AWDI ABS ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE OF ANTI-LOCK SPRING SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW DEFROST WINDSHIELD ELECTRICALLY HEATED PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP LIFTOATE-RELEASE AND LIFTGATE OPEN DEFROST AND LOWER AIR OUTLET VENTILATING IAN WINDOW LOCK ELECTRONIC THIRCHTITLE CONTROL FOUR WHEEL DRIVE BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING PARKING BRAKE BATTERY CHARGINS HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK / DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT TETHER ANCHOR VOICE RECOOK/THICK BUTTON WARNING TOW/HAUL GLOW FLUG POWER STEERING FLUID WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SIDE AIRBAS AIRBAS SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY RELEASE HANDLE LIGHTER LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN (LATCH) UCONNECT™ BUTTON HAZARD 4 LOW FAIR WHEEL DRAYS LOW MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT TRAKS OIL TEMP ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SRS AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PASSenger AIRSAG OFF DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE TOPDOWN CONVERTIBLE TOP UP HORN SEE OWNER'S MANUAL ISO A/C PUSH AIR CONDITIONS OFF

010533317

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.

Interior view of a car showing a curved body with a black arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols.

VINLocation

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible structural components and a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols)

VINLocation

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoacollisionresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS....12

□Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)....12

□Key Fob....

□Removing Key Fob From Ignition....14

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....16

■SENTRY KEY®....17

□Replacement Keys....18

□Customer Key Programming....19

□General Information....19

■VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM....19

□Rearming Of The System....20

□To Arm The System....20

1 3 □To Disarm The System....2 1

□Security System Manual Override....2 2

■ILLUMINATED ENTRY....22

■REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ..... 2 3

□To Unlock The Doors. 23

□To Lock The Doors....26

□To Open The Trunk....27

□ Using The Panic Alarm .....27

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

□Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 8
□Transmitter Battery Replacement....28
□General Information....28

■ REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .29

□How To Use Remote Start....29

■DOOR LOCKS....3 3

□Manual Door Locks....3 3
□Power Door Locks....3 4

■KEYLESS ENTER-N-GOTM 36

■WINDOWS....41

□Power Windows....4 1
□Wind Buffeting....42

■TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE....43

■TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. 4 4

□ Trunk Emergency Release .....44

■OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS....45

□Lap/Shoulder Belts....49
□ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....53
□ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions .....54
□Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped....5 5
□ Energy Management Feature .....56
□Seat Belt Pretensioners....56
□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 5 6
□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 5 7
□Seat Belt Extender....58

□Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags....58

□Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . 6 5

□Event Data Recorder (EDR) 7 2

□Child Restraints 73

□Transporting Pets....96

■ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS....96

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

■SAFETY TIPS....97

□Transporting Passengers. 97

□Exhaust Gas 98

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....99

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....101

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up.

KeylessEnter-N-Go™Feature

If this vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

1 2 3 4 020205345

WirelessIgnitionNode(WIN)

1—OFF
2 — ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
3—ON/RUN
4 — START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with the Vehicle Security Alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm or press the Start/Stop button to disarm the security alarm.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Illustration of a car key with a handle and gear (no text or symbols)

020207762

EmergencyKeyRemoval

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up.

Removing Key Fob From Ignition

Remove the Start/Stop button (if equipped), place the shift lever in PARK or place the manual transmission in REVERSE and apply the parking brake. Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. Refer to "Starting And Operating/Starting Procedures" for further information on removing the Start/Stop button.

With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ system, the EVIC will display the ignition switch position "OFF/ACC/RUN". Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sun-roof — if equipped, and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

CAUTION!

• If your vehicle battery becomes slow or dead, your KeyFob will become locked in the ignition.
• DonotattempttoremovetheKeyFobwhileinthis condition,damagecouldoccurtotheKeyFobor ignitionmodule.Onlyremovetheemergencykey forlockingandunlockingthedoors.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• LeavetheKeyFobintheignitionandeither:
• JumpStartthevehicle.
• Chargethebattery.

WARNING!

• Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplytheparking brake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARKorthe manualtransmissioninREVERSE,andremovethe KeyFobfromtheignition.Whenleavingthe vehicle,alwayslockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornethevehicle,or inalocationaccessibletochildren,anddonot leavetheignitionofavehicleequippedwith KeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUN mode.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,other controls,ormovethevehicle.
• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

An unlocked carisan invitation to thieves. Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition OFF with Key less Enter-N-Go™, and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.

If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, opening the driver's door when the vehicle's ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)

will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

The SentryKey® Immobilizersystemisnotcompatiblewithsomeaftermarketremotestartingsystems. Useofthesesystemsmayresultinvehiclestarting problemsandlossofsecurityprotection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

• AlwaysremovetheKeyFobsfromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.
• ForvehiclesequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™, alwaysremembertoplacetheignitionintheOFF position.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.

Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Rearming Of The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the "OFF" position (refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And Operating" for further information).

2. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

3. For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

4. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

5. Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

6. Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information).

7. Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

8. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE: The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

- If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

TamperAlert

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and the exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

NOTE:

- The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (extreme top position).

- The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome defeat" position (extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

Illustration of a car key with a handle and internal compartments, alongside a separate view of the same key (no text or symbols present)

020207436

KeyFobWithRKETransmitter

To Unlock The Doors

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press", refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument panel" for further information.

If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM (Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

RemoteKeyUnlock, DriverDoor/AllDoorsFirst

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.

FlashLightsWithRemoteKeyLock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
• Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.

1. Release both buttons at the same time.
2. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.
3. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

TurnHeadlightsOnWithRemoteKeyUnlock

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM (Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

SoundHornWithRemoteKeyLock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
• Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
• Release both buttons at the same time.
• Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob removed.
• Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.

To Open The Trunk

Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to open the trunk.

If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM (Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Programming Additional Transmitters

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.

2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.

Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

1. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even "gap" between the two halves. If equipped, install and tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter operation.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of nately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
  •Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  •RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
  • Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)

WARNING!

- Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.Carbon Monoxideispoisonousandcancauseseriousinjuryordeathwheninhaled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

ToEnterRemoteStartMode

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

ToExitRemoteStartModeWithoutDrivingThe Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

ToExitRemoteStartModeAndDriveTheVehicle

Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release the START/STOP button. If the START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the message "Insert Key/Turn To On" will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. Once inserted, the message "Turn To On" will display in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the message "Push Button/Insert Key" will display in the EVIC until you push the START button.

CancelRemoteStart

Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• Any engine warning lights come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
  • The hood is opened
  • The hazard switch is pressed
  • The shift lever is moved out of PARK
  • The brake pedal is pressed

• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock knob on each door trim panel upward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled buttons and a black arrow pointing to the door (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

DoorLockKnob

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

- Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofacollision,lockthevehicledoorsbeforeyoudriveaswellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.

- Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheKey Fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.

(Continued)

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren, and donot leavetheignitionofvehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUN mode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is located on each door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to a control panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerDoorLockSwitch

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".

If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

AutomaticDoorLocks—IfEquipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled through your EVIC. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings" for additional information.

AutomaticDoorLocks—IfEquipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.

AutomaticUnlockDoorsOnExit

The doors will unlock automatically if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AutomaticUnlockDoorsOnExitProgramming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

ToUnlockFromTheDriver'sSide:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

Hand holding a car door handle, no visible text or symbols on the object

GrabTheDoorHandleToUnlock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press", refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ToUnlockFromThePassengerSide:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

PreventingInadvertentLockingOfPassiveEntryRKE TransmitterInVehicle

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

ToEnterTheTrunk:

With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the located on the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the license plate.

Front view of a modern sedan car with visible grille and side-mounted buttons (no text or symbols)

TrunkPassiveEntryButton

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless another one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.

ToLockTheVehicle'sDoors:

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both doors.

Illustration of a hand holding a car handle, showing the grip and seat area (no text or symbols)

PressTheDoorHandleButtonToLock

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Hand holding a smartphone with a circular stop sign symbol (no text or numbers visible)

DoNOTGrabThehandleWhenLocking

NOTE:

• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.

WINDOWS

Power Windows

The window controls on the driver's door control both of the door windows.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a hand cursor pointing to the left side of the control panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerWindowSwitches

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

There is a single window control on the passenger's door trim panel that operates the window on the passenger's door. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.

NOTE:

• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will return to its fully closed position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistance and prevents window and seal damage.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenunattendedinavehicle,anddo notletchildrenplaywithpowerwindows.Donot leavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle,orina locationaccessibletochildren,anddonotleavethe ignitionofavehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUNmode.Occupants, particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrappedbythewindowswhileoperatingthepower windowswitches.Suchentrapmentmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

AUTO-DownFeature—IfEquipped

The driver's door power window switch and passenger door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.

To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with one window open, then open the other window to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE

The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) before the button will operate.

Circular icon with a white car silhouette on a dark gray background, no text or symbols present.

TrunkRelease Button

The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed.

With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for more information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.

TRUNK SAFETY WARNING

WARNING!

Donotallowchildrentohaveaccesstothetrunk, eitherbyclimbingintothetrunkfromoutside,or

WARNING!(Continued)

throughtheinsideofthevehicle.Alwaysclosethe trunklidwhenyourvehicleisunattended.Oncein thetrunk,youngchildrenmaynotbeabletoescape, eveniftheyenteredthroughtherearseat.Iftrapped inthetrunk,childrencandiefromsuffocationor heatstroke.

Trunk Emergency Release

As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.

(Continued)

Medical illustration showing a bone structure with an arrow pointing to a specific area, no text or symbols present.

TrunkEmergencyInternalRelease

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

- Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

45

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
  • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
  • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for the driver and front outboard passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event
• All seat belt systems (except the driver's) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children12yearsoldandundershouldalwaysride buckledupinarearseat.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearearfacinginfantseatinfrontofan airbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFrontAir Bagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild12 yearsoryounger,includingachildinarearward facinginfantseat.
• Onlyusearearward-facingchildrestraintina vehiclewitharearseat.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

1. Alloccupantsshouldalwaysweartheirlapand shoulderbeltsproperly.
2. Thedriverandfrontpassengerseatsshouldbe movedbackasfaraspracticaltoallowtheAdvanced FrontAirBagsroomtoinflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

1. Donotleanagainstthedoororwindow.If your vehiclehassideairbags,anddeploymentoccurs,the sideairbagswillinflateforcefullyintothespace betweenyouandthedoor.
2. If the air bagsystem in this vehicle need to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance".

WARNING!

- Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbeltseventhoughyouhave airbags.

(Continued)

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirBagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Air bagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.
• SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)andSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SAB)alsoneedroomtoinflate.Donotleanagainstthe doororwindow.Situprightinthecenterofthe seat.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• BeingtooclosetotheSupplementalSideAirBag InflatableCurtain(SABIC)and/orSeat-Mounted SideAirBag(SAB)duringdeploymentcouldcause youtobeseverelyinjuredorkilled.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• Donotallowpeopleorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandcantaketheforcesofacollisionbest.
• Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionstowear yourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengers safe,too.

(Continued)

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch plate will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

LatchPlate

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Interior view of a car showing the seat, steering wheel, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

LatchPlateToBuckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING!

• Abelthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncouldride toohighonyourbody,possiblycausinginternal injuries. Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothebuckle nearestyou.
• Abelthtatistooloosewillnotprotectyouproperly.Inasuddenstop,youcouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnug.

(Continued)

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Abeltthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancauseinternalinjuries.Ribsarenotasstrongasshoulder bones.Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothat yourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

• Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap

belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNING!

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof internalinjuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon't beatthestronghipandpelvicbones,butacross yourabdomen.Alwayswearthelapbeltaslowas possibleandkeepitsnug.

• Atwistedbeltcannotdoitsjobaswell.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethebelt isstraight.Ifyoucannotstraightenabeltinyour vehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediatelyandhaveitfixed.

• Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

RemovingSlackFromBelt

1. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(bentretractor,tornwebbing, etc.).

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
3. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

	DriverCenterPassenger
First Row N/A	N/A	ALR
Second Row	ALR	ALR	ALR

•N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

1. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Thebeltandretractorassemblymustbereplacedif theseatbeltassemblyAutomaticLockingRetractor (ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnot workingproperlywhencheckedaccordingtothe proceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacethebeltandretractorassembly couldincreaseetheriskofinjuryincollisions.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant's chest.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®)

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Onlyuse whentheseatbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn

WARNING!(Continued)

lowandsnugandintherecommendedseatingpositions.Removeandstoretheextenderwhennot needed.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

(Continued)

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts, showing steering wheel, dashboard, and control panel

AdvancedFrontAirBagAndKneeBolsterLocations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle is equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and their covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

AirBagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
  • Air Bag Warning Light

•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors

AdvancedFrontAirBagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!

- Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheair bagontheinstrumentpanel, becauseanysuch objectscouldcauseharmifthevehicleisina collisionsevereenoughtocausetheairbagto inflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured because the airbags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.

- Donotdrill, cutortamperwiththekneebolsterin anyway.

- Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneebolster suchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenbandradios, etc.

(Continued)

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SAB)

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.

AIR BAG 0226008351

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)

SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.

Interior view of a car showing the rearview and side profile with two black arrows pointing to the dashboard area (no text or symbols present)

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains(SABIC)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Yourvehicleisequippedwithleftandright SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC),donotstackluggageorothercargoup highenoughtoblockthelocationoftheSABIC. TheareawheretheSABICislocatedshouldremain freefromanyobstructions.
• Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandthesideairbags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• YourvehicleisequippedwithSABICairbags,do nothaveanyaccessoryitemsinstalledwhichwill altertheroof,includingaddingasunrooftoyour vehicle.Donotaddroofracksthatrequirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)forinstallation onthevehicleroof.Donotdrillintotheroofofthe vehicleforanyreason.
• Donotallowoccupantstoextendanypartoftheir bodyoutsideofthewindow.

SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

OccupantRestraintController(ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors, including the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF

position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the

self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbags toprotectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome onasabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirstturned on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicethe airbagsystemimmediately.

DriverAndPassengerAdvancedFrontAirBag InflatorUnits

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

are possible, based on several factors, including the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBag(SAB) InflatorUnits

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)InflatorUnits—IfEquipped

During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

FrontAndSideImpactSensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.

IfADeploymentOccurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andthefrontseatbeltretractorassembliesreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerimmediately.Also,havetheOccupantRestraintController(ORC)systemservicedaswell.

MaintainingYourAirBagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure,or addaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartoftheair bagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bags systems service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, need to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening / tightening of seat attachment bolts), tak the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories maybe used. If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

(Continued)

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AirBagWarningLight

You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to "Fuses" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for the proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

- For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information:

- http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to holdevenan infant your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, nomatter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

SummaryOfRecommendationsForRestrainingChildrenInVehicles

	ChildSize,Height,WeightOrAgeRecommendedTypeOfChildRestraint
Infants and Toddlers	Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint	Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint		Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt		Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

InfantsAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearearfacinginfantseatinfrontofan airbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFrontAir Bagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild12 yearsoryounger,includingachildinarearward facinginfantseat.
• Onlyusearearward-facingchildrestraintina vehiclewitharearseat.

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer's directionsexactlywhen installinganinfant or childrestraint.
• Afterachildrestraintisinstalledinthevehicle,do notmovethevehicleseatforwardorrearward becauseitcanloosenthechildrestraintattachments.Removethechildrestraintbeforeadjusting thevehicleseatposition.Whenthevehicleseathas beenadjusted,reinstallthechildrestraint.

(Continued)

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with these seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In as sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury.

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Neverallowachildtoputtheshoulderbeltunderan armorbehindtheirback.Inacrash,theshoulderbelt willnotprotectachildproperly,whichmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.Achildmustalwayswear boththelapandshoulderportionsoftheseatbelt correctly.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RecommendationsForAttachingChildRestraints

RestraintType	Combined Weightofthe Child+Child Restraint	Useanyattachmentmethodshownwithan“X”Below
		LATCH-LowerAnchors Only	SeatBeltOnly	LATCH-LowerAnchors +TopTether Anchor	SeatBelt+Top TetherAnchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)				X

LowerAnchorsAndTethersForChildren(LATCH) RestraintSystem

Anchor. Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

022668173

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCHPositionsForInstallingChildRestraintsIn ThisVehicle

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and interior panels with no visible text or symbols

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use	the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No Do not use	the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?	N/A

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

LocatingTheLATCHAnchorage

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt structure with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

LATCHAnchorage

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LocatingTheLATCHAnchorage

There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.

They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.

Interior view of a car showing seat, side pay button, and dashboard (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapAnchorage

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

CenterSeatLATCH

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.Pleasereferto"Installing TheLATCHChildRestraintSystem"fortypical installationinstructions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Always follow the direction of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraints system will be installed as described here.

ToInstallALATCH-compatibleChildRestraint

1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

1. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.

3. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

HowToStowAnUnusedALRSeatbelt

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofaninfant orchildrestraint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjured orkilled.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Childrestraintanchoragesaredesignedtowith-standonlythoseloadsimposedbycorrectly-fitted childrestraints.Undernocircumstancesaretheyto beusedforadultseatbelts,harnesses,orfor attachingotheritemsorequipmenttothevehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheVehicleSeat Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/ShoulderBeltSystemsforInstallingChild RestraintsinthisVehicle

ALR ALR ALR ALR ALR

022669137

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint Al	ways use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes Contact between the front passenger	seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?	No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	Yes In positions with cinching latch	plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

InstallingAChildRestraintWithASwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.

1. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing AChildRestraint With ACinching Latch Plate (CINCH)—If Equipped

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

93

rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat.

1. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
2. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click".
3. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
4. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. Refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.

1. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage

Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the

tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.

1. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.

1 3 A B 022636908

TetherStrapMounting

1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook

3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor

1. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

• Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectly behindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split reseat, makes sure the ether strap does not slip into the opening between these seat backs as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as required.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

- Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriously injuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopleorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

eventuallypoisonyou.Toavoidbreathing(CO), followthesesafetytips:

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomove yourvehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate/reard oors open, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch this set at high speed. DONOT usethere circulation mode.
• Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcooling controlstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Setthe blowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

AirBagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized

dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

- Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloor coveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperly securedtopreventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththepedalsortheabilitytocontrolthe vehicle.
• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsontop ofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additionalfloor matsandothercoveringswillreducethesizeofthe pedalareaandinterferewiththepedals.
• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Always properlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthathave beenremovedforcleaning.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• If required, mountingpostsmustbeproperlyinstalled, if notequipped from the factory. Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallation or mountingcan cause interference with the brake pedaland accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■MIRRORS....108

□Inside Day/Night Mirror....108

□Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .109

□Outside Mirrors....1 1 0

□Outside Mirrors Folding Feature....1 1 0

□Power Mirrors....1 1 1

□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2

□Vanity Mirrors. 1 1 2

□Illuminated Vanity Mirrors....1 1 2

□“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor....1 1

■ Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED....113

□Operation....1 1 5

□ Phone Call Features....123

□Uconnect® Phone Features .....126

□Advanced Phone Connectivity....130

□Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone.....132

□ General Information .....143

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

■VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .....143

□Voice Command System Operation .....143

□Commands....145

□Voice Training....149

■SEATS 149

□Power Seats....150

□Heated Seats — If Equipped .....152

□Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .153

□Manual Front Seatback Recline .....154

□Passenger Seat Easy Entry....155

□Head Restraints....155

□Folding Rear Seat....157

■TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .....159

■LIGHTS....161

□Headlights And Parking Lights....161

□Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .....162

□Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)....162

□Headlight Time Delay....162

□Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 163

□Lights-On Reminder....164

□Fog Lights — If Equipped .....164

□Multifunction Lever....165

□Turn Signals....165

□Lane Change Assist....166

□High/Low Beam Switch .....166

□Flash-To-Pass....166

□Map/Reading Lights....166

□Interior Lights....167

■WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....168

□Intermittent Wiper System .....169

□Mist Feature....169

□Windshield Washers....169

☐Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)....170

■TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .171

■ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED .....172

□To Activate....173

□To Set A Desired Speed....173

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

□To Deactivate....174

□To Resume Speed....174

□To Vary The Speed Setting .....174

□To Accelerate For Passing....175

■PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED....176

□ParkSense® Sensors .....176

□ParkSense® Warning Display .....177

□ParkSense® Display....177

□Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®. . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

□Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System....181

□Cleaning The ParkSense® System .....182

□ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .182

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

■OVERHEAD CONSOLE....184

□Courtesy/Reading Lights....184

□Sunglasses Storage....185

■GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .185

□Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .186

□Programming A Rolling Code....186

□Programming A Non-Rolling Code .....188

□Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .190

□Using HomeLink®.191

□Security....191

□Troubleshooting Tips....191

□General Information. 192

■POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....193

□Opening Sunroof — Express .....194

□Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .....194

□Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

□Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode .....195

□Pinch Protect Feature .....195

□Venting Sunroof — Express .....195

□Sunshade Operation....196

□Wind Buffeting....196

□Sunroof Maintenance....196

□Ignition Off Operation....196

■ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS....197

■CUPHOLDERS....201

□Front Cupholders....201

□Rear Cupholders....201

■CONSOLE FEATURES....202

□Sliding Center Console Armrest....202

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

□Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

■REAR WINDOW FEATURES....203

□Rear Window Defroster....203

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Side mirror with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the mirror itself)

AdjustingRearviewMirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.

Front view of a car rear mirror with a black arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

030406002

AutomaticDimmingMirror

CAUTION!

Toavoiddamagetothemirrorduringcleaning,never sprayanycleaningsolutiondirectlyontothemirror. Applythesolutionontoacleanclothandwipethe mirrorclean.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.

NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passengersideconvexmirrorcouldcauseyouto collidewithanothervehicleorotherobject.Useyour insidemirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofa vehicleseeninthepassengersideconvexmirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of the vehicle and three detent's (counterclockwise) towards the front of the vehicle.

Close-up of a car's side mirror and dashboard with two circular insets showing the wheel (no text or symbols)

FoldingMirrors

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Power Mirrors

The power mirror controls are located on the driver's door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a control panel and circular dial indicator (no text or symbols visible)

PowerMirrorControl

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

Vanity Mirrors

A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward.

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Illuminated VanityMirror

"Slide-On-Rod" And Extender Features Of Sun Visor

To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature of the sun visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the

desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.

Interior view of a car showing the rearview and side profile of a vehicle's headrest (no text or symbols visible)

Slide-On-RodExtender

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., "Call" ... "Mike" ... "Work" or "Dial" ... "248-555-1212"). Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile," Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for supported phones.

For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowingallapplicablelaws,includinglawsregardingphoneuse.Yourattentionshoubefocusedonsafelyoperatingthevehicle.Failureretodosomayresultinacollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

Uconnect®PhoneButton

The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) will contain the two control buttons (Uconnect® Phone button and Voice Command button) that will enable you to

access the system. When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.

VoiceCommandButton

Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operation" section.

The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect® Phone such as "CELL" or caller ID on certain radios.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect® Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Ready" prompt or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Setup" and then "Pair a Device," the following compound command can be said: "Pair a Bluetooth® Device."
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound form voice command "Phonebook New Entry," or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: "Phonebook" and "New Entry." Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

VoiceCommandTree

Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.

HelpCommand

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.

CancelCommand

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.

Pair(Link)Uconnect®PhoneToAMobilePhone

To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone pairing instructions:

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Device Pairing."
• When prompted, after the beep, say "Pair a Device" and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

- You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

DialBySayingANumber

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial."

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
• For example, you can say "234 567 8901."
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.

CallBySayingAName

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Call."
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say "John Doe," where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to "Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook," in the phonebook.

- The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

PhonebookDownload—AutomaticPhonebook TransferFromMobilePhone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect® website for supported phones.

- To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a Name" section.

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect® Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• Either the mobile phone's phonebook or the mobile phone's SIM card phonebook is downloaded.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

- This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next phone connection.

AddNamesToYourUconnect®Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the 📋 button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook New Entry."
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say "Robert Smith" or "Robert" instead of "Bob."

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., "Home," "Work," "Mobile," or "Other"). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-book entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone's phonebook.

EditUconnect®PhonebookEntries

NOTE:

• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• Press the 📋 button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Edit Entry."

• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

"Phonebook Edit Entry" can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add "John Doe's" work number later using the "Phonebook Edit Entry" feature.

DeleteUconnect®PhonebookEntry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the

button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Delete."

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say "List Names" to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the button while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say "Delete."
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Delete/Erase"All"Uconnect®PhonebookEntries

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Erase All."
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

ListAllNamesInTheUconnect®Phonebook

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook List Names."
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the button during the playing of the desired name, and say "Call."

NOTE: The user can also exercise "Edit" or "Delete" operations at this point.

• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.
  • The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—NoCall CurrentlyInProgress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—Call CurrentlyInProgress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the 📋 button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

MakingASecondCallWhileCurrentCallIsIn Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the button and say "Dial" or "Call" followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to "Toggling Between Calls" in this section. To combine two calls, refer to "Conference Call" in this section.

Place/RetrieveACallFromHold

To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

TogglingBetweenCalls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

ConferenceCall

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-WayCalling

To initiate three-way calling, press the button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under "Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress." After the second call has established, press and hold the button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

CallTermination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the

active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

Redial

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial."
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect® Phone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

CallContinuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone Features

LanguageSelection

To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and is usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

- Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Emergency" and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.

NOTE:

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say "Setup," followed by "Emergency."
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.

WARNING!

TouseyourUconnect®PhoneSysteminanemergency,yourmobilephonemustbe:

WARNING!(Continued)

•turnedon,
•pairedtotheUconnect®System,
• andhavenetworkcoverage.

Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance

If you need roadside assistance:

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Towing Assistance."

NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assistance phone number using the Voice Command system. To do this, press the button and say "Setup," followed by "Towing Assistance." When prompted say 1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.

(Continued)

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.

VoiceMailCalling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to "Working with Automated Systems".

WorkingWithAutomatedSystems

This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.

When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word "Send." For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, "3 7 4 6 # Send." Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by "Send," is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.

You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the (12VR) button and say "Send." The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.

The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.

BargeIn—OverridingPrompts

The "Voice Command" button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking "Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...," you could press the 🐘VR button and say, "Pair a Phone" to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

TurningConfirmationPromptsON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say one of the following:

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts On"

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts Off"

PhoneAndNetworkStatusIndicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

DialingUsingTheMobilePhoneKeypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

Mute/Un-Mute(MuteON/OFF)

When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:

• Press the 📊VR button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute."
  To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
• Press the VR button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute off."

Advanced Phone Connectivity

TransferCallToAndFromMobilePhone

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the 🐘VR button and say "Transfer Call."

ConnectOrDisconnectLinkBetweenThe Uconnect®PhoneAndMobilePhone

Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual.

ListPairedMobilePhoneNames

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing."

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

• When prompted, say "List Phones."
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone being announced, press the 📄VR button and say "Select" or "Delete." Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone.

SelectAnotherMobilePhone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Select Phone" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the 📋 button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

- The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

DeleteUconnect®PhonePairedMobilePhones

• Press the button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing."
• At the next prompt, say "Delete" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the 📋 button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone

Uconnect®PhoneTutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say "Uconnect® Tutorial."

VoiceTraining

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:

From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):

- Press and hold the (a)VR button for five seconds until the session begins, or,

- Press the button and say the "Voice Training," "System Training," or "Start Voice Training" command.

You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Reset

- Press the button.

- After the "Ready" prompt, and the following beep, say "Setup," then "Reset."

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.

VoiceCommand

• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 12 inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
  • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.

Performance is maximized under:

- Low-to-medium blower setting

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
  •Dry weather condition

NOTE:

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say "Send."

• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect® Phonebook.

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. "800" must be spoken "eight-zero-zero" not "eight hundred."
• You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

FarEndAudioPerformance

• Audio quality is maximized under:
- Low-to-medium blower setting
- Low-to-medium vehicle speed
- Low road noise

- Smooth road surface

- Fully closed windows

• Dry weather conditions, and

- Operation from the driver's seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect® Phone.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

- In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

RecentCalls

If your phone supports "Automatic Phonebook Download," Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

SMS

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on your phone.

ReadMessages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:

- Press the 📋 button.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Read" or "Read Messages."
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for you.

After reading a message, you can "Reply" or "Forward" the message using Uconnect® Phone.

SendMessages:

You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send a new message:

• Press the 📋 button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Send" or "Send Message."
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say "List Messages." There are 20 preset messages.

To send a message, press the 📄VR button while the system is listing the message and say "Send."

Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to.

List of Preset Messages:

1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction
5. LOL
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me

9. Call me later

10. Thanks

11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I'll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

TurnSMSIncomingAnnouncementON/OFF

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages.

- Press the 📋 button.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement," you will then be given a choice to change it.

Bluetooth®CommunicationLink

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Recent Calls"]
    A --> C["Call"]
    A --> D["Dial"]
    A --> E["Radial"]
    A --> F["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> G["Emergency"]
    A --> H["English/Espanol/Français"]
    A --> I["Phonebook"]
    A --> J["Setup"]
    A --> K["Uconnects Tutorial"]
    A --> L["SMS"]
    L --> M["Read Messages"]
    L --> N["Send Messages"]
    O["The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used. The phones paired are available across all languages."] --> P["Number associated with entry is dialed"]
    O --> Q["Number is Dialed"]
    R["Enter Name"] --> S["Number associated with entry is dialed"]
    T["Enter Number"] --> U["Number is Dialed"]
    V["Last Number on Phone is redialed"] --> W["End"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

030772523

graph TD
    A["Phonebook"] --> B["New Entry"]
    A --> C["Edit"]
    A --> D["List Names"]
    A --> E["Delete"]
    A --> F["Erase All"]
    A --> G["Download"]
    B --> H["Enter Name"]
    H --> I["Enter Location"]
    I --> J["Enter Number"]
    J --> K["New Entry Added"]
    C --> L["Enter Name"]
    L --> M["Enter Location"]
    M --> N["Current Number is played"]
    N --> O["Enter New Number"]
    O --> P["Entry is modified"]
    D --> Q["Entries Listed one at a time."]
    E --> R["Enter Name"]
    R --> S["Enter Location"]
    S --> T["Entry Deleted"]
    F --> U["1st Confirmation"]
    U --> V["2nd Confirmation"]
    V --> W["Phonebook Cleared"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

81c6bf80

Voice Tree - Setup

graph TD
    A["Setup"] --> B["Confirmation Prompts"]
    A --> C["Select Audio Devices"]
    A --> D["SMS, Incoming Message Announcement"]
    A --> E["Voice Training"]
    A --> F["Reset"]
    A --> G["Device Pairing"]
    A --> H["Emergency"]
    A --> I["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> J["Select Phone"]
    A --> K["Language"]
    B --> L["Toggle Confirmation Prompts on/off"]
    C --> M["Say 4 digit pn code."]
    D --> N["Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing."]
    E --> O["Pair"]
    F --> P["List Phones"]
    G --> Q["Delete"]
    H --> R["All"]
    I --> S["New phone will temporarily override phone priorities."]
    J --> T["Select phone to be deleted"]
    K --> U["Select a language: English, Espanol or Francais"]
    L --> V["Phone Deleted"]
    M --> W["System confirms"]
    N --> X["System Lists Phones"]
    O --> Y["All Phones Deleted"]
    P --> Z["System lists phones"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

030605540

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate	(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location

all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu

select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

Voice Command System Operation

The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,

satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowingallapplicablelaws,includinglawsregardingphoneuse.Yourattentionshoubbefocusedonsafelyoperatingthevehicle.Failureretodosomayresultinacollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

When you press the Voice Command 📄VR button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the Voice Command (VR) button, listen for the beep, and say your command.

Pressing the Voice Command 📄 button while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel," "Help" or "Main Menu."

These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Command (VR) button and say "Help" or "Main Menu."

Commands

The Voice Command system understands two types of commands, Universal commands and Local commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.

ChangingTheVolume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button.
2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

1. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.

MainMenu

Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command (VR) button. You may say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

• "Radio AM" (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• "Radio FM" (to switch to radio FM mode)
• "Sat" (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
• "Disc" (to switch to the disc mode)
• "USB" (to switch to USB mode)

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• "Bluetooth Streaming" (to switch to Bluetooth® Streaming mode)
• "Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder)
• "System Setup" (to switch to system setup)

RadioAM

To switch to the AM band, say "AM" or "Radio AM." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)
• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)
• "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

RadioFM

To switch to the FM band, say "FM" or "Radio FM." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)
• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)
• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

SatelliteRadio

To switch to satellite radio mode, say "Sat" or "Satellite Radio." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Channel Number" (to change the channel by its spoken number)

• "Next Channel" (to select the next channel)

• "Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)

• "List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)
• "Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)
• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

DiscMode

To switch to the disc mode, say "Disc." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Track" (#) (to change the track)
• "Next Track" (to play the next track)
• "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

USBMode

To switch to USB mode, say "USB." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Next Track" (to play the next track)
• "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
• "Play" (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album Name, Track Name, etc.)

Bluetooth®Streaming(BT)Mode

To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say "Bluetooth Streaming." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Next Track" (to play the next track)
• "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
  • "List" (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MemoMode

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say "Memo." In this mode, you may say the following commands:

- "New Memo" (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command (VR) button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

- "Save" (to save the memo)

- "Continue" (to continue recording)

- "Delete" (to delete the recording)

- "Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Command (VR) button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

- "Repeat" (to repeat a memo)

- "Next" (to play the next memo)

- "Previous" (to play the previous memo)

- "Delete" (to delete a memo)

- "Delete All" (to delete all memos)

Setup

To switch to system setup, you may say one of the following:

• "Change to system setup"
• "Main menu system setup"
• "Switch to system setup"
• "Change to setup"
• "Main menu setup" or
• "Switch to setup"

In this mode, you may say the following commands:

- "Language English"

• "Language French"
• "Language Spanish"
- "Tutorial"
- "Voice Training"

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command ( VR ) button first and wait for the beep before speaking the “Barge In” commands.

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® Voice "Voice Training" feature may be used.

1. Press the Voice Command 📄VR button, say "System Setup" and once you are in that menu then say "Voice Training." This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

1. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

- Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.

(Continued)

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareasare morelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Power Seats

The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are used to control the position of the seat.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerSeatSwitch

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

PowerLumbar—IfEquipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise and lower the position of the support.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerLumbarSwitch

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderapowerseator impedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamageto theseatcontrols.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat's path.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The heaters provide the same average heat level for both the cushion and the seatback.

There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently. The controls for each seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-level setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

WARNING!

• Personswhoareunabletofeelpaintotheskin becauseofadvancedage,chronicillness,diabetes, spinalcordinjury,medication,alcoholuse,exhaustionorotherphysicalconditionmustexercisecare whenusingtheseatheater.Itmaycauseburns evenatlowtemperatures,especiallyifusedfor longperiodsoftime.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatorseatbackthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorcushion. Thismaycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sitting inaseatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcause seriousburnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureoftheseat.

Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment

The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe properlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Adjust theseatonlywhilethevehicleisparked.

Manual Front Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

ReclineLever

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

Passenger Seat Easy Entry

On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a normal seating position, first return the seatback to its original recline location and then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set lock position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Interior view of a car showing a car's head and side profile with a black arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols present)

EasyEntryLever

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Theheadrestraintsforallooccupantsmustbeproperlyadjustedpriortooperatingthevehicleoroccupyingaseat.Headrestraintsshouldneverbeadjustedwhilethevehicleisinmotion.Drivinga vehiclewiththeheadrestraintsimproperlyadjusted orremovedcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathinthe eventofacollision.

ActiveHeadRestraints—FrontSeats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants head and the AHR.

The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

PushButton
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

WARNING!

DonotplaceitemsoverthetopoftheActiveHead Restraint,suchascoats,seatcoversorportableDVD players.Theseitemsmayinterferewiththeoperation oftheActiveHeadRestraintintheeventofa collisionandcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

Folding Rear Seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

FoldingRearSeatFoldedRearSeat

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

WARNING!

• Becertainthattheseatbackissecurelylockedinto position.Iftheseatbackisnotsecurelylockedinto position,theseatwillnotprovidetheproperstabilityforchildseatsand/orpassengers.Animproperlylatchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjury.
• The cargo are in therear of the vehicle (with the reseat backs in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

Two latches must be released to open the hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing a key inserted into the seat, with a black arrow pointing to the key (no text or symbols visible)

HoodReleaseLever

1. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front view of a black sports car with a white arrow pointing downward on the roof (no text or symbols on the car itself)

HoodSafetyCatch

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehood to closeit. Lowerthehooduntilitisopenapproximately6in(15cm), andthendropit. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hoodis fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

LIGHTS

Headlights And Parking Lights

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.

A O DE ED # D PUSH ! O 031440047

HeadlightSwitch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A (AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.

To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.

If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will cancel the delay.

If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.

NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature.

The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights (DRL) whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are off and the parking brake is released. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.

If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights, the front turn signal lamps provide the DRL function. If equipped, the DRL will flash when a turn signal is in operation, and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is no longer flashing.

WARNING!

Atransienthighvoltageoccursatthebulbsocketsof HIDheadlampswhentheheadlampswitchisturned ON.Itmaycauseserioselectricalshockorelectrocutionifnotservicedproperly.Seeyourauthorized dealerforservice.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is built into the head-light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch.

A O DOE ID 扣 PUSH 031440048

FogLightOperation

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

PUSH WASH MIST OFF - WIPER LO HI

MultifunctionLever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

- If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

- A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams will shut off.

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.

Interior view of a car dashboard with front panel and side buttons (no text or symbols visible)

OverheadConsole

Interior Lights

The interior lights come on when a door is opened.

To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.

DimmerControl

The dimmer control is located to the right of the head-light switch. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door handles and cupholders.

DomeLightPosition

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

InteriorLightDefeat(OFF)

Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.

ParadeMode(DaytimeBrightnessFeature)

Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

PUSH WASH MUST OFF - WIPER LO Hi

031563089

WindshieldWiper/WasherLever

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

CAUTION!

Turnthewindshieldwipersoffwhendriving throughanautomaticcarwash.Damagetothewindshieldwipersmayresultifthewiperswitchisleftin anypositionotherthanoff.

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mist Feature

Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoacollision.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwiththedefrosterbeforeandduring windshieldwasheruse.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO) position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.

Medical illustration of a human eye with an arrow pointing to the eyelid area (no text or symbols present)

Tilt/TelescopingControlHandle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Failureto followthiswarningmayresultinseriousinjuryor death.

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

ON/OFF RES + CANCEL SET - 1 2 3 4 032209541

ElectronicSpeedControlButtons

1—ON/OFF 3—SET-

2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.

Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

ToIncreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

ToDecreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

- Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

- If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or above. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster's EVIC display. It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

ParkSense® Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

PARK ASSIST READY

ParkAssistReady

032740690

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Park Assist System Off

032740691

PARK ASSIST

032740694

ParkAssistSystemOffSlowTone

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.

PARK ASSIST

032740693

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

PARK ASSIST

032740692
FastToneContinuousTone

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (in/cm)	Greater than 59 in (150 cm)	59-39 in (150-100 cm)	39-25 in (100-65 cm)	25-12 in (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime	None Single	1/2 Second Tone	Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3	Solid	(Continuous)	3 Slow Flashing	2 Slow Flashing	1 Slow Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No Yes Yes	Yes Yes

NOTE:ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" message for five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" or "WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

If "WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.

If "SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM" appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

- Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instrument cluster will display "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will display "PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the EVIC.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense® inordertobeabletostopintime when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense®.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheRearParkAssistsystem.Alwayscheck carefullybehindyourvehicle,andbesuretocheck forpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions, orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youareresponsible forthesafetyofyoursurroundingsandmustcontinuetopayattentionwhilebackingup.Failureretodo socanresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may also be included, if equipped.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a backrest panel and control buttons (no text or symbols visible)

OverheadConsole

Courtesy/Reading Lights

At the forward end of the overhead console are two courtesy/reading lights.

Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light.

These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.

Sunglasses Storage

At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.

The storage compartment access is a "push/push" design. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink® channels.

Close-up of a four-panel industrial control panel with three vertical slots, no visible text or symbols

HomeLink®Buttons

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC displays "CHANNELS CLEARED."

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Technical diagram showing installation of a control panel with labeled components and a close-up of the device's exterior view.

TrainingTheGarageDoorOpener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

1. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand - held transmitter button.
3. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

• At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly press and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

1. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). The EVIC will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the EVIC displays "CHANNEL # TRAINING" Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand - held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.
• If the EVIC displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

1. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button while you press and release ("cycle"), your hand - held transmitter every two seconds.

4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

• Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the EVIC displays "CHANNEL # TRAINING" Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC displays "CHANNELS CLEARED."

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:

- Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegaragewhile programmingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascancause seriousinjuryordeath.

WARNING!

Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouareprogrammingtheuniversaltransceiver.Donotprogramthetransceiverifpeople,pets orotherobjectsareinthepathofthedoororgate. Onlyusethistransceiverwithagaragedooropener thathasa"stopandreverse"featureasrequiredby Federalsafetystandards.Thisincludesmostgarage dooropenermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donot useagaragedooropenerwithoutthesesafetyfeatures.Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,ontheInternet atwww.HomeLink.comforsafetyinformationor assistance.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.

AUTO MENT AUTO 034207291

PowerSunroofSwitch

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildrenunattendedinavehicle,or withaccesstuan unlocked vehicle. Neverleavethe KeyFobinornearthevehicle,orinalocation accessibletochildren.Donotleavetheignitionof avehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™ in theACCorON/RUNmode.Occupants,particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrapped bythepowersunroofwhileoperatingthepower sunroofswitch.Suchentrapmentmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.
• Inacollision, thereisagreatarriskofbeingthrown fromvehiclewithanopensunroof. Youcould alsobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled. Alwaysfasten yourseatbeltproperlyandmakesureallpassengersarealsopropertysecured.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesunroof. Neverallowyourfingers,otherbodyparts,orany object,toprojectthroughthesunroofopening. Injurymayresult.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

(Continued)

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

For VehiclesEquippedWithTheEVIC

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.

The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position. This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar knob and element must be used.

CAUTION!

• Donotexceedthemaximumpowerof160Watts(13 Amps)at12Volts.Ifthe160Watt(13Amp)power ratingisexceededthefuseprotectingthesystem willneedtobereplaced.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepower outletsasthiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthe fuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancause damagenotcoveredbyyourNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ESC OFF 12V DC 0346003768

Close-up of a car engine compartment with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

FrontPowerOutletCenterConsolePowerOutlet

The center console power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times).

Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.

Internal view of a car's internal components with numbered labels pointing to key keys and buttons

034636790

PowerOutletFuseLocations

1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeofoutlet shouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledrivingthe vehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough, the vehicle's battery will discharges sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessoriesor longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe alternatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepower outletasthiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthe fuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancause damagenotcoveredbyyourwarranty.

(Continued)

CUPHOLDERS

Front Cupholders

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to a keyway (no text or symbols visible)

FrontCupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

IlluminatedFrontCupholders—IfEquipped

The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

Rear Cupholders

The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant's elbows.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car seat with a highlighted lever (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a left-pointing arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

RearCupholdersSlidingConsoleArmrest

CONSOLE FEATURES

Sliding Center Console Armrest

The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use and shifting ease.

Console Storage

The center console has a storage compartment located underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). The center console may also be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Refer to "Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If Equipped" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a black arrow pointing to the mode (no text or symbols present)

CenterConsole

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

WARNING!

Donotoperatethisvehiclewithaconsolecompartmentlidintheopenposition.Drivingwiththeconsolecompartmentlidopenmayresultininjuryinacollision.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive windowcleanersontheinteriorsurfaceofthe window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES....208

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER....209

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . .210

■ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)....221

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays....223

□Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .225

□Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .225

□Trip Functions....227

□Sport Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

□ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped . .230

□Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If Equipped .....231

□Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .231

□SystemWarnings (Customer Information Features). 234

□Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)....234

■Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED....239

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

☐Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped .....239
□Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped....239

■Uconnect® 130....240

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .240
☐Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play .....243
□Notes On Playing MP3 Files .....245
☐Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .248

■Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .249

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .249
☐Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play .....255

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files .....257
□LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .260
□INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .260
□Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped .....261
□Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped .....261

■ iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ..265

□Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device....266
□Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
□Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons....268
□Play Mode....268

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

□List Or Browse Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
□Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) .....271

■HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .272

■STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED....274

□Radio Operation....274

□CD Player....275

■CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE....275
■RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .276
■CLIMATE CONTROLS....276

□Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....276
□Automatic Operation....277
□Blower Control....278
□Manual Operation....278
□Operating Tips....282

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

Diagram of car dashboard with numbered labels pointing to key components such as air condition meters and control panel.

1 — Air Outlets 6 — ESC OFF Switch 11 — Ignition Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Sport Button 12 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Glove Compartment 8 — Hazard Warning Switch 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Radio 9 — Heated Steering Wheel Switch
5 — Heated Seat Switch 10 — Climate Control

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 BRAKE AM 950 32°F 60 MPH 100 40 100 160 120 20 40 200 140 160 150 160 18 RND C H 040340708

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1.FuelGauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.

2.TripOdometerButton

Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings. The letter "A" or "B" will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it.

3.Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

4.ElectronicSpeedControlIndicatorLight

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is on.

5.Tachometer

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area.

6.ChargingSystemWarningLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position. This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, place the shift lever in PARK, for manual transmission place the transmission in neutral, apply the parking brake, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. In this case, you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.

Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting.

8.TemperatureGauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads "H,"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonthe"H,"andyouhearachime,turnthe engineOFFimmediatelyandcallforservice.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous. Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant. Youmaywanttocallaservicecenterifyour vehicleoverheats. If youdecidetolookunderthe hoodyourself, referto "MaintainingYourVehicle" and followthewarningsundertheCoolingSystem PressureCappagraph.

9. TurnSignalIndicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

10.AirBagWarningLight

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns

on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

11. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature is critically hot. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime will sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to cool. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information).

12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light—If Equipped

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

13. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light—If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

14. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

15. HighBeamIndicator

This indicator will turn on when the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam.

16.SeatBeltReminderLight

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

17.ShiftLeverIndicator—AutomaticTransmission Only

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

18.FrontFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

19. Odometer/Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display Area

The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to "Trip Odometer Button" for additional information.

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

The EVIC features a driver-interactive display, for further information refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".

20.BrakeWarningLight

BRAKE This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththebrakelightonisdanger- ous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed.Itwill takelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhavea collision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

21. VehicleSecurityLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

22. TirePressureMonitoringTelltaleLight

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishforthetiresize

CAUTION!(Continued)

equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacanor balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not

(Continued)

functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

24.LowFuelLight

This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.

25.MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine

start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMalfunctionIndicator Light(MIL)oncouldcausedamagetotheengine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability.IftheMILisflashing,severecatalytic converterdamageandpowerlosswillsoonoccur. Immediateserviceisrequired.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drives lowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.

80 60 min 100 40 20 30 20 30 350 360 W 32 °F AM 950 041038791

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status
  • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
  • Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
  • Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect® phone (If Equipped)
  • Uconnect® gps Screens (If Equipped)
  • Audio Mode Display

- Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround [DSS])

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

Close-up of a black square mobile phone control panel with icons for VR, telephone, play, document, and directional arrows.

EVICSteeringWheelButtons

040935150

MENUButton

Press and release the MENU button to access the main menu, or to return to the main menu from the sub-menus.

UPButton

Press and release the UP button to scroll upward through the main menus and sub-menus. DOWNButton

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub-menus.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

SELECTButton

Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to reset

features.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
  • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Door Ajar
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Oil Change Required
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Channel # Transmit
• Channel # Training
• Channel # Trained

• Clearing Channels

• Channels Cleared

• Did Not Train
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)
  •Service TPM System (with a single chime)
• Tire Pressure Display Screen With Low Tire(s) "Inflate Tire to XX"
• ESC Off – Electronic Stability Control is deactivated
  • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
• Check Gascap
  • Key Fob Battery Low
  •Service Keyless System
• Wrong Key
  • Damaged Key

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

•Key not Programmed
- Vehicle Not in Park
•Key Fob Not Detected
- Press Brake & Push Button to Start
- Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to "Remote Starting System" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle")
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT

Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped

The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.

When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.

When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower gear.

The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return to a situation where changing gear is not required to improve fuel consumption.

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

OilChangeRequired

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.

VehiclesEquippedWithKeylessEnter-N-Go™

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.

3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.

VehiclesNotEquippedWithKeylessEnter-N-Go™

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

Trip Functions

Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:

• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
- Distance To Empty
- Trip A
- Trip B
- Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in

Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.

The Trip Functions mode displays the following.

• AverageFuelEconomy/FuelSaverMode—If Equipped
• Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "RESET" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
• The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner.

EXAMPLE ONLY

FUEL SAVER MODE

Average MPG

23.5 ▶ Reset

1148 mi

041002027

FuelSaverMode-OnFuelSaverMode-Off

- This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.

EXAMPLE ONLY

Average MPG

23.5 ▶ Reset

1148 mi

041002028

- DistanceToEmpty(DTE)

- Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance

is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of "LOW FUEL." This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will display.
• TripA

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• TripB
  Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.
• ElapsedTime

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

- DisplayUnitsofMeasurein

To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

ToResetTheDisplay

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second window.)

Sport Mode

This light will illuminate when the sport mode is selected. This mode provides performance based tuning. For further information, refer to "Sport Mode" in "Starting And Operating".

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped

When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch position.

ACC OFF RUN

041008156

KeylessEnter-N-Go™Display

The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-GoTM" in "Starting And Operating" for more information.

NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be superseded by another display of higher priority. But when the ignition switch position is changed, the display always re-appears.

Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If Equipped

Press and release the MENU button until "Surround Sound" displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.

• Stereo
• Surround Sound

While in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT button to change surround modes. The Video Surround

Mode will only be available for video media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by the radio).

Compass Display — If Equipped

MENUButton

The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release the MENU button until "Compass" displays in the EVIC.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AutomaticCompassCalibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

ManualCompassCalibration

If the compass appears erratic and the "CAL" message does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.

3. Press the UP or DOWN button until "CALIBRATE COMPASS" displays in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration. The message "CAL" will display in the EVIC.
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" message turns off. The compass will now function normally.

CompassVariance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 040506040

CompassVarianceMap

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until "COMPASS VARIANCE" message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit.

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

System Warnings (Customer Information Features)

Press and release the MENU button until "SYSTEM WARNINGS" displays in the EVIC. Then, press the Up or DOWN button to display any one of the following choices.

- OilTemperature

Shows the actual oil temperature.

- OilPressure

Shows the actual oil pressure.

•TirePressure

Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE).

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.

Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.

Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices.

Language

When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the Uconnect® gps (if equipped). Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect® language selection.

LockDoorsAutomaticallyat15mph(24km/h)

When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

UnlockDoorsAutomaticallyonExit

When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

RemoteKeyUnlock

When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE

transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When AllDoors1stPressis selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "Driver Door 1st Press" or "All Doors 1st Press" appears.

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver's door opening. If driver door first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RemoteStartComfortSys.

When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

SoundHornWithRemoteKeyLock

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

HornWithRemoteStart

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

FlashLightsWithRemoteKeyLock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

HeadlampsOnWithWipers(AvailableWithAuto HeadlampsOnly)

When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle."

DelayTurningHeadlightsOff

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "0," "30," "60," or "90" appears.

HillStartAssist(HSA)—IfEquipped

When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

TurnHeadlightsOnWithRemoteKeyUnlock

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "OFF," "30 sec.," "60 sec.," or "90 sec." appears.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DelayPowerOffToAccessoriesUntilExit

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "Off," "45 sec.," "5 min.," "10 min.," "30 min.," or "60 min." appears.

Turn-by-TurnNavigation—IfEquipped

When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.

DisplayECOMode—IfEquipped

The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/Temperature display; this message can be turned on or off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

KeylessEnter-N-Go™(PassiveEntry)

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".

Enable/DisableTheRearParkAssistSystem

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE

position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer to "Rear Park Assist System" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.

DisplayUnitsOfMeasureIn

The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED

Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped

Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" for further details.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 130

SEEK SEEK AM/FM DISC AUX RW IF TIME SINGLE DISC - VPS TUSN ON VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 PUSH AUDIO/SELECT TUNE/SCROLL SET END OFF

042305232

Uconnect®130

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingTheTone,BalanceAndFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetThePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels. Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheUconnect®130isasingleCDplayer.Donot attempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andtheycan causedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton—EjectingACD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button operates in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEGSpecification	SamplingFrequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32 320	256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16 160	128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackOfMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

SEEK SEEKM INFO RW IF TIME SINGLE DISC - MP3 PUSH ON AM/FM SAT DISC AUX SUBRS% LIST MUSIC TYPE SETUP TUBE/SELL 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET END ABS

042340030
Uconnect®130

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

VoiceCommandSystem(Radio)—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect®Phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingTheTone,BalanceAndFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College	College
Country	Country
Foreign Language	Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- SetClock— Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetThePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

- ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only.Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.

(Continued)

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotuseadhesivelabels. Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheUconnect®130isasingleCDplayer.Donot attempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.
• Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andtheycan causedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton—EjectingACD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEGSpecification	SamplingFrequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32 320,	256, 224,192, 160, 128,112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16 160,	128, 144,112, 96, 80, 64,56, 48, 40, 32,24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackOfMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions—AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" for further details.

Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccess

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

SelectingUconnect®Multimedia(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

- The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions—Uconnect®Multimedia (Satellite)Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SETButton—ToSetThePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center console or glove compartment.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect® Multimedia radio User's Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control feature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external USB device to the vehicle's USB/AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compartment.

AUX 044036451

CenterConsoleUSB/AUXConnectorPort

NOTE: The center console will have a position where the iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the center console base, route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable.

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to connect to the USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device).

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons

To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the "AUX" button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say "USB" or "Switch to USB." Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.

Play Mode

When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external USB device and display data:

- Use the TUNEcontrol knob to select the next or previous track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR button and say "Next Track."
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say "Previous Track."
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF>> button.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

during play mode will jump to the next track in the list, or press the VR button and say "Next or Previous Track."

• While a track is playing, press the INFObutton to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFObutton again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFObutton press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say "Repeat ON" or "Repeat Off."
• Press the SCANbutton to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the

SCANbutton again. During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.

- RNDbutton (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB device, or press the VR button and say "Shuffle ON" or "Shuffle Off." If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.

- TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device.

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNEcontrol knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNEcontrol knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
• In List mode, the radio PRESETbuttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external USB device:

• Preset 1 – Playlists

• Preset 2 – Artists

• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

- Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.

- To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESETbutton again to go back to Playmode.

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNEcontrol knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio

device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system.

- MUSICTYPEbutton: The MUSICTYPEbutton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.

CAUTION!

• LeavingtheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice(orany supporteddevice)anywhereinthevehicleinextremeheatorcoldcanaltertheoperationordamagethedevice.Followthedevicemanufacturer's guidelines.
• PlacingitemsontheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice, orconnectionstotheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice inthevehicle, cancausedamagetothedevice and/ortotheconnectors.

WARNING!

DonotpluginorremovetheiPod®orexternalUSB devicewhiledriving.Failureretofollowthiswarning couldresultinanaccident.

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect® phone system.

ControllingBTSAUsingRadioButtons

To enter BTSA mode, press either "AUX" button on the radio or press the VR button and say "Bluetooth Streaming Audio."

PlayMode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle's audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected and played.

SelectingADifferentAudioDevice

1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
2. After the "Ready" prompt and following the beep, say "Setup", then say "Select Audio Devices."
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.

NextTrack

Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Next Track," to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone.

PreviousTrack

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Previous Track," to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone.

Browse

Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.

HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies delivering substantial increases in component and system efficiency levels.

The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surround sound processing.

Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating position This surround effect is available for audio from any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard

AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio touchscreen. Refer to "Customer Programmable Features" under "Uconnect® SETTINGS" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".

Selecting "Surround Sound" through the Uconnect® radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.

When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode but should be set to the center position for optimal surround performance.

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with black arrows indicating clockwise direction (no text or symbols)

045035190

RemoteSoundSystemControls(BackViewOfSteering Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/HDD/AUX etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the center button will select the next available CD in the player.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

AUTO PUSH A/C PUSH AUTO PUSH

045640031

AutomaticTemperatureControl

Automatic Operation

Operation of the system is quite simple.

Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the Blower Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.

045638695

Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob (center knob). Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort

level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the "O" (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.

The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72^ F ( 22^ C); however, this may vary.

NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Blower Control

045607536

For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation, turn the blower knob to the AUTO position. In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (left knob).

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.

Automatic Temperature Control Operation		The system will...
Operation	How	Blower Control	Mode Control	Air Temperature Control	Air Recirculation Control	A/C Operation
Full Automatic Operation	Set blower knob to Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden.	Automatic
Blower Preferred	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden.	Automatic
Mode Preferred	Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set blower knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.Not allowed in Defrost Mode	User selectable A/C on or off.
Manual Mode	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.Not allowed in Defrost Mode	User selectable A/C on or off.

045669145

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (right knob) to one of the following positions.

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel.

These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

•Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

•Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and

side window demist outlets.

•Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

•Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-

mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-shield and side window defrosting.

• AirConditionerControl

045638696

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.

• RecirculationControl

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in defrost mode in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

- Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in defrost mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

WinterOperation

Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

VacationStorage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur.

SideWindowDemisters

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

A/CAirFilter

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to "Maintenance Schedules" for filter service intervals.

ControlSettingSuggestionsForVariousWeatherConditionsWhileInManualOverride

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT	Open the windows and start the vehicle. Set the fan control to the high position (full clockwise). Press thebutton.Set the Mode control at or betweenand. Set the temperature control to full cool. After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press thebutton to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows. Once you are comfortable, press thebutton to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort.
WARM WEATHER[OCWA][8608]	If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or near.
COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS[SCCA]	Press thebutton to turn recirculate off.If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or betweenandthen turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If the windows begin to fog, set Mode control at or betweenand.
COLD DRY CONDITIONS[SZZZ]	Set the Mode control at or near. If it is sunny, you may want more upper air. In this case, set the Mode control at or betweenand.In very cold weather, if you need extra heat at the windshield, set the Mode control at or near the.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■STARTING PROCEDURES....290

□Manual Transmission — If Equipped. . . . . . . .290

□Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .291

□Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped . . . . . . .292

□Normal Starting. 293

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20^ F Or -29^ C)....296

□If Engine Fails To Start....296

□After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

■ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .299

■MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .299

□Six-Speed Manual Transmission....299

□Shifting. .301

□Recommended Shift Speeds....302

□1-4 Skip Shift....303

□Downshifting....303

■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ....304

□ Key Ignition Park Interlock....306

□Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .306

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

□Five-Speed Automatic Transmission....306
□Gear Ranges....307

■AUTOSTICK®....314
□Operation....314

■SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED .....316

■DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES....316
□Acceleration....316
□Traction....317

■DRIVING THROUGH WATER....317
□Flowing/Rising Water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
□Shallow Standing Water....318

■POWER STEERING....319

■FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY — IF EQUIPPED....321

■PARKING BRAKE....321 □Manual Transmission — If Equipped....322 □Automatic Transmission — If Equipped....322

■BRAKE SYSTEM....324 □Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....324

■ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . 327 □Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . □Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . □Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . □Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . □Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

□ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

■TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION....336

□Tire Markings....336

☐Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . . . 340

□Tire Terminology And Definitions....342

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .....343

■TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .....348

□Tire Pressure....348

□Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

☐Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .351

□Radial Ply Tires....351

□Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

□Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

□Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

□Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

□Tread Wear Indicators....356

□Life Of Tire....357

□Replacement Tires....358

■TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .....359

■TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS....361

■TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .362

□Base System....365

□Premium System — If Equipped .....367

□General Information....371

■FUEL REQUIREMENTS....371

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

□3.6L Engine — If Equipped....371
□5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .372
□5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . .373
□Reformulated Gasoline....373
□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....373
□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....374
□MMT In Gasoline....374
□Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
□Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
□Carbon Monoxide Warnings....376

■ADDING FUEL....376

□Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....376

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message....378

■VEHICLE LOADING....379

□Vehicle Certification Label .....379
□Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .....379
□Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .....379
□Overloading....380
□Loading....380

■TRAILER TOWING....381

□Common Towing Definitions....381
□Trailer Hitch Classification....384
□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)....385
□Trailer And Tongue Weight....385
□Towing Requirements....386

□Towing Tips....391

■RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .393

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .393

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheKey Fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUN mode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

NormalStartingWithIntegratedKey—Manual Transmission

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!

Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Unburnedfuelcouldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncetheenginehasstarted, ignite and damagetheconverterandvehicle. If the vehicle has adischarged battery, boostercables maybe used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. Referto "Jump Starting" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• DonotshiftfromREVERSE,PARK,orNEUTRAL intoanyforwardgearwhentheengineisabove idlespeed.
• ShiftintoPARKonlyafterthevehiclehascometo acompletestop.
• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthevehicle hascometoacompletestopandtheengineis at idlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

UsingFobWithIntegratedKey(TipStart)

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the ENGINE START/STOP button is installed and the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.

InstallingAndRemovingTheENGINE START/STOPButton

InstallingTheButton

1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.

3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position.

RemovingTheButton

1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed from the ignition switch for key fob use.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the chrome bezel at the 6 o'clock position and gently pry the button loose.

NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ).

Normal Starting

UsingTheENGINESTART/STOPButton—AutomaticTransmissionOnly

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, press the button again.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

UsingTheENGINESTART/STOPButton—ManualTransmissionOnly

1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.
2. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, release the button.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

ToTurnOffTheEngineUsingENGINE START/STOPButton—AutomaticTransmission Only

1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a "VEHICLE NOT IN PARK" message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.

ToTurnOffTheEngineUsingENGINE START/STOPButton—ManualTransmission Only

1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then apply the parking brake.

NOTE:

• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0mph (0km / h) and the engine is not running.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice to the OFF position.

KeylessEnter-N-Go™Functions—WithDriver's FootOFFTheBrakePedal/ClutchPedal(InPARK OrNEUTRALPosition)

The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC displays "IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY"),

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition switch to the RUN position (EVIC displays "IGNITION MODE RUN"),

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC displays "IGNITION MODE OFF").

Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!

- Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. This could result in a flashfire causing serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatictransmissioncannotbestedthisway.Unburnedfuel couldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncethe enginehasstarted,igniteanddamagetheconverter andvehicle.
• If the vehicle has ad discharged battery, booster cables maybe used to obtain a start from abooster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What ToDo In Emergencies" for further information.

ClearingAFloodedEngine(UsingENGINE START/STOPButton)—AutomaticTransmission Only

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

ClearingAFloodedEngine(UsingENGINE START/STOPButton)—ManualTransmission Only

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

ClearingAFloodedEngine(UsingFobWith IntegratedKey)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:

1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages.

The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, wait10to15 secondsbeforetryingagain.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that

is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheater cordbeforedriving.Damagetothe110-115Volt electricalcordcouldcauseelectrocution.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Six-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwithouthavingtheparking brakefullyapplied.Theparkingbrakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthdriverisnotinthevehicle, especiallyonanincline.

CAUTION!

• Neverdrivewithyourfootrestingontheclutch pedal,ortrytoholdthevehicleonahillwiththe clutchpedalpartiallyengaged,asthiswillcause abnormalwearontheclutch.Referto"Electronic BrakeControlSystem/HillStartAssist"in"StartingAndOperating"forfurtherinformation.
• Failuretopresstheclutchpedalfullytothefloor maycauseincreasedshiftefforts,andmayresultin damagetotheclutchandtransmission.
• Donotrestyourhandontheshiftleverwhile driving, asthismayresultintransmissionsynchronizerdamage.
• Donotattempttoshiftthetransmissioniftherear wheelsarespinningduetolossoftraction.Damagethetransmissionmayoccur.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the lever itself)

ManualShifter

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal when shifting.

The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This spring helps you know which gear you are in when you are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second or downshifting from sixth to fifth.

The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first to fourth or from sixth to third gear.

CAUTION!

Alwaysmakesurethevehiclecomestoacomplete stopbeforeshiftingintoREVERSE.Failureretodoso mayresultintransmissiondamage.

You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting from a standing position.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recommended Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart.

MANUALTRANSMISSIONRECOMMENDEDSHIFTSPEEDS
AxleRatio		1-4 4-5	5-6
3.73 mph	20 25 42
	(km/h) (32) (40) (67)
3.91 mph	20 37 48
	(km/h) (32) (59) (77)

Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.

Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired acceleration rate.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™), as compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™). This is normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor system.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, you may hear your transmission. This can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.

Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.

1–4 Skip Shift

There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106^ F ( 41^ C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at 14 throttle or less. The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed during these times.

When the "1-4 Skip Shift Indicator Message" is displayed, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.

Downshifting

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep grade.

WARNING!

Skippingmorethanonegearwhiledownshifting, could causeyoutolosecontrolofyourvehicle. You could have acollision.

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• Ifyouskipmorethanonegearwhiledownshifting ordownshiftattoohighanenginespeed,you coulddamagetheengine,transmission,orclutch.
• Donotdownshiftintofirstgearwhenthevehicleis movingfasterthan15mph(24km/h),asyoucould damagetheengineand/orclutch.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

- ShiftintoPARKonlyafterthevehiclehascometo acompletestop.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthevehicle hascometoacompletestopandtheengineisat idlespeed.
• DonotshiftbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, orDRIVEwhentheengineisaboveidle speed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

(Continued)

WARNING!

- Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUN mode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Five-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to "AutoStick®" in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

ShiftLever

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the ignition to the OFF position before restarting. Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the OFF position first.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotcompletelyinPARK.Checkbytryingto movetheshiftleveroutofPARKwiththebrake pedalreleased.Makesurethetransmissionisin PARKbeforeleavingthevehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than midlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, turntheengineoff,andremovethekeyfob.When theignitionisinthefullOFF(keyremoval)position,thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securing thevehicleagainstunwantedmovement.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobandlockyourvehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstuan unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento beinavehicleunattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. Achildorotherscould be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal ortheshift lever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavevehiclee equipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™ in the ACCorON/RUNmode. Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheLOCK/OFF positiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopress thebrakepedal.Otherwise,damagetotheshift levercouldresult.
• DONOTracetheenginewhenshifting from PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange, asthis candamagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

- When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to "AutoStick®" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

SPORT—IfEquipped

This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.

To toggle between normal mode and SPORT mode, press the SPORT switch on the instrument panel.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

AUTOSTICK®

AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter

AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.

• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached.
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the transmission will remain in the selected gear even when maximum engine speed is reached. The transmission will upshift only when commanded by the driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided by fuel cut off at or near redline.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick® is engaged.

To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped) until "D" is once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED

This mode alters the transmission's automatic shift schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. On the center console, there is a "SPORT" button that when pressed the vehicle will enter "SPORT" mode.

AUTO PUSH .96° 72° 78° 60 A/C PUSH 84 AUTO PUSH ↓ SPORT 058341462

SPORTButton

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidacceleration on slipperysurfaces is dangerous. Unequaltraction can cause sudden pulling of therear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerates slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, looses and, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Donotdriveon, orcross, aroadorapath where waterisflowing and/or rising (asinstormrun-off). Flowingwater can wear away theroador path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can

(Continued)

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

carryyourvehicleawaysswiftly.Failuretofollowthis warningmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousor fataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

- Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'stractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph (8km/h)whendrivingthroughstandingwater.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'sbrakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstoppingdistances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstandingwater,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthebrakepedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.
• Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultin injuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

CAUTION!

- Alwayscheckthedepthofthestandingwater beforedrivingthroughit.Neverdrivethrough standingwaterthatisdeeperthanthebottomof thetirerimsmountedonthevehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepath thatisunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesin thewaybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.
• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendriving throughstandingwater.Thiswillminimizewave effects.
• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycauseddamage toyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Always inspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil,transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination(i.e., fluidthatismilkyorfoamyinappearance)after drivingthroughstandingwater.Donotcontinueto operatethevehicleifanyfluidappearscontaminated,asthismayresultinfurtherdamage.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andcauseserious internaldamagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

POWER STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power steering system that will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the system will provide mechanical steering capability.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

Extremesteeringmaneuversmaycausethelectricallydrivenpumptoreduceorstoppowersteering assistanceinordertopreventdamagetothesystem. Normaloperationwillresumeoncethesystemis allowedtocool.

If the "SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM" message and a flashing icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE OWNER'S MANUAL" message and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme

steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. You will lose power steering assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.

When the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a circular vent and directional arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

ManualTransmissionParkingBrakeRelease

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage.

Pilot 054171715

AutomaticTransmissionParkingBrake

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheKey Fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.

WARNING!(Continued)

• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), anddonot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUN mode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.
• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandacollision.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicle,oritmayrollandcausedamageor injury.Alsobecertaintoleavethetransmissionin PARK.Failurertodosomayallowthevehicletoroll andcausedamageorinjury.

(Continued)

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

If the "BrakeWarningLight" remains on with the parkingbrakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunction is indicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

BRAKE

Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock:

• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop)
  • The clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipments should be performed by qualified professionals.
• PumpingoftheAnti-LockBrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoacollision. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneedto slowdownorstop.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in arecklessordangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

Anti-LockBrakeWarningLight

The "Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light" monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The

light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning Light” is not on.

If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”

does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the "Brake Warning Light" and the "ABS Warning Light" remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill Start Assist (HSA) is standard on all models.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

The ABScannotpreventthenaturallawsofphysics fromactingonthevehicle,norcanitincreasethe tractionaffordedbyprevailingroadconditions.The ABScannotpreventcollisions,includingthoseresultingfromexcessivespeedinturns,drivingonvery slipperysurfaces,orhydroplaning.Thecapabilitiesof anABS-equippedvehiclemustneverbeexploitedina recklessordangerousmannerthatcouldjeopardize theuser'ssafetyorthesafetyofothers.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.

A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for more information.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.

Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The BAS cannot prevent then natural law so physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slipper surface, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle

during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

HSAActivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic transmissions.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhillswithloaded vehicle,orwhilepullingatrailer,whenthesystem willnotactivateandslightrollingmayoccur.This couldcauseacollisionwithanothervehicleorobject. Alwaysrememberthedriverisresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

Disabling/EnablingHSA

If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds.

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the "ESC Off" switch (located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls) four times within 20 seconds. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" should turn on and turn off two times.

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

1. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
3. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it's previous setting.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer.

•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot prevent then natural law so of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

allaccidents, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESCals cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle controleduetoin appropriate driver input for the conditions. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ESCOperatingModes

The ESC system has two or three available operating modes:

ESCON

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

PartialOff

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.

The "ESC Off" switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will turn off.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

Whenin"PartialOff"mode,theTCSportionofESC, exceptforthelimitedwheelspinfeaturedescribedin theTCSsection,hasbeendisabledandthe"ESCOff IndicatorLight"willbeilluminated.Whenin"PartialOff"mode,theenhancedvehiclestabilityoffered bytheESCsystemisreduced.

FullOff—IfEquipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF. To enter the "Full Off" mode, press and hold the "ESC Off" switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in the vehicle odometer. The "ESC OFF" message may appear

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE: The "ESC OFF" message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur when the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

IntheESC"FullOff"mode,theenginetorque reductionandstabilityfeaturesaredisabled.Therefore,theenhancedvehiclestabilityofferedbyESCis unavailable.Inanemergencyevasivemaneuver,the ESCsystemwillnotengagetoassistinmaintaining

WARNING!(Continued)

stability."ESCOff"modeisintendedforoff-highway oroff-roaduseonly.

NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential. If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch.

(Continued)

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" also

flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or full off.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

TIRE NAME P215/65R15 95H MANUFACTURER REKWEER 280 RACCHON A TEMPERATE 1 2 3 4 5 6

054903773

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grade

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

TireSizingChart

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

LT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT or S = Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)– Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code– "R"means radial construction– "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol- A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions- The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad(LL)= Light load tire

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad- Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure - Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 03 means the 3rd week

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 01 means the year 2001- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure	Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedColdTireInflation Pressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacardLocation

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and window (no text or symbols visible)

B-PillarLocationForTireAndLoadingInformation Placard

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY - TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX LBS. TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195/70R14 P195/70R14 T125/70D15 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 200kPa, 29PSI 200kPa, 29PSI 420kPa, 60PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268

811b5a9a

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) - 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant's weight = AVAILABLE Cargo/Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 5 2 3 865 lbs minus 670 lbs = 195 lbs EXAMPLE 2 3 2 1 865 lbs minus 540 lbs = 325 lbs EXAMPLE 3 2 2 0 865 lbs minus 400 lbs = 465 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 130 lbs Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 100 lbs Occupant 5: 80 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs

811a4d11

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•Safety
• Economy
• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
  • Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
  • Over-inflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffective-vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly, resulting in lossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldlosecontrolofyourvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicle totheothercancausethevehicletodrifttothe rightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaximumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriouscollision.Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

TireRepair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
- The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
- The puncture is no greater than 14''(6~mm) .

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Code).

Tire Types

AllSeasonTires—IfEquipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

SummerOrThreeSeasonTires—IfEquipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions. For more information, contact a authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

SnowTires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire, please refer to "TIREFIT KIT" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited - usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

SpareTireMatchingOriginalEquippedTireAndWheel—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

CompactSpareTire—IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

$$ T, S = \text { Temporary Spare Tire } $$

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compactsparesarefortemporaryemergencyuse only.Withthesespares,donotdrivemorethan 50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespareshavelimited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failureretodosocouldresultin sparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

FullSizeSpare—IfEquipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-UseSpare—IfEquipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-usesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimited-usesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimit-usesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressureslistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocated onthedriver'ssideB-Pillarortherearedgeofthe driver'ssidedoor.Replace(orrepair)theoriginal equipmenttireatthefirstopportunityandreinstallit onyourvehicle.Failureretodosocouldresultinloss ofvehiclecontrol.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tired damage or failure. Atire could explode and injures someone. Donotspinyour vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) form more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donotlet any on near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Close-up of two car tires showing tread pattern and tire tread (no text or symbols)

055007576

1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to "Replacement Tires" in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

- Driving style

- Tire pressure

- Distance driven

- Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator." Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

- Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Install on Rear Tires Only.
- Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 or P225/60R18 tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could close control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observ the following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and others suspension components, it is important that only traction devices being good condition are used. Brokendevices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged part of the device before further use.
• Installdeviceastightlyaspossibleandthenre-tightenafterdrivingabout ^1/2 mile(0.8km).
• Donotexceed30mph(48km/h).
• Drivecautiously and avoid severeturns and large bumps, especially with loaded vehicle.
• Donotdriveforaprolongedperiodondrypavement.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Observethetractiondevicemanufacturer's instructionsonthemethodofinstallation,operating speed,andconditionsforuse.Alwaysusethe suggestedoperatingspeedofthedevicemanufacurer'sifitislessthan30mph(48km/h).
• Donotusetractiondevicesonacompactsparetire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Vehicle 1"] --> B["Vehicle 2"]
    C["Vehicle 3"] --> B["Vehicle 2"]
    D["Vehicle 4"] --> B["Vehicle 2"]
    A --> C
    B --> D
    C --> D
    A <--> B
    C <--> D
    B <--> C
    B <--> D
    C <--> D

055703771

TireRotation

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 6.5^ C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the "TPM Telltale Light" to turn off. The system will automatically update and the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusing replacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Usingaftermarkettiresealantsmay causetheTirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS) sensorobecomeinoperable.Afterusinganaftermarkettiresealantitisrecommendedthatyoutake yourvehicletoyourlocaldealertohaveyour sensorfunctionchecked.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure, alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve stem,whichcoulddamagetheTPMsensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "TPM Telltale Light."

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "TPM Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a "LOW TIRE" message will be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the "TPM Telltale Light" and "LOW TIRE" message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

ServiceTPMSWarning

If a system fault is detected, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The "TPM Telltale Light" will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

VehicleswithCompactSpare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn ON and a "LOW TIRE" message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically and the "TPM Telltale Light" and "LOW TIRE" message will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System — If Equipped

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "TPM Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a "LOW TIRE" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. An "Inflate Tire to XX" message will also be displayed in the EVIC display.

EXAMPLE ONLY

Low Tire PSI 27 30 27 21 2345 mi

TirePressureMonitorDisplay

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate Tire to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

ServiceTPMSWarning

If a system fault is detected, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

EXAMPLE ONLY

Tire PSI 30 33 30 --

055900260

TirePressureMonitorDisplay

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "TPM Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no

longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is displayed.

VehicleswithCompactSpare

1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the "TPM Telltale Light" will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value and the "Inflate Tire to XX" message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the "TPM Telltale Light" will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:

United States MRXC4W4MA4
Canada 2546A-C4W4MA4

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L Engine — If Equipped

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use

of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)

The 3.6L and 5.7L engine (with automatic transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.

5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)

The 5.7L engine (with manual transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality premium unleaded gasoline

with an octane rating of 91 or higher.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DonotusegasolinescontainingMethanol.Useof theseblendsmayresultinstartinganddrivability problemsandmaydamagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol.

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:

- Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).

• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory.

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• The useofleadedgasisprohibitedbyFederallaw. Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginem maybe out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The useoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuelsystemdamage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuel soradditives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbon monoxidepoisoning:

- Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engineer running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithpropermaintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspectedevery timethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormal conditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired,drive withallsidewindowsfullyopen.
• Keepthetrunkclosedwhendrivingyourvehicleto preventcarbonmonoxideandotherpoisonousex-haustgasesfromenteringthevehicle.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

(Continued)

Illustration of a door with open lid and internal compartments (no text or symbols)

0568003762
FuelFillerCap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissionscontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap(gascap).
• Apoorlyfittinggascapcouldletimpuritiesinto thefuelsystem.
• Apoorlyfittinggascapmaycausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot "top off" the fuel tank after filling. Whenthefuel nozzle "clicks" or shut soff, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

- Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthe vehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthetankis beingfilled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neveraddfueltothevehiclewhentheengineis running.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle. You couldbeburned. Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer or a "Check Gascap" message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

VEHICLE LOADING

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the "Vehicle Certification Label". This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.

Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver's door.

The label contains the following information:

•Name of manufacturer
•Month and year of manufacture
•Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you donot exceed them a maximum front or rear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Overloading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

NOTE: Refer to the "Vehicle Certification Label" affixed to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

ManualTransmission—IfEquipped

Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

WARNING!

- An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch systemmayreducehandling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.

(Continued)

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

• WeightDistributingSystemsmaynotbecompatible withSurgeBrakeCouplers.Consultwithyourhitch andtrailermanufacturerorareputableRecreational Vehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustryStandards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/TransmissionFrontalArea	Max.GTW(Gross TrailerWt.)	Max.TongueWt.
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg)	100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg)	100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severelyside to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

60% 40% 057003767

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

- Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine,axle orotherpartscouldbedamaged.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoacollision.Followthese guidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingassafeas possible:

- Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shift can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could close control of your vehicle and have a collision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poor performance, ordamagetobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructure, ortires.

- Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto theframeorhookretainersofthevehiclehitch. Crossthechainsunderthetrailertongueandallow enoughslackforturningcorners.

- Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade.Whenparking,applytheparkingbrakeon thetowvehicle.Putthetowvehicleautomatic transmissioninPARK.Always,blockor"chock" thetrailerwheels.

• GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:
  1.Maxloadingasdefinedonthe"TireandLoading Information" placard.
  2.GTW
  3.GAWR
• Tongueweighitratingforthetrailerhitchutilized.

TowingRequirements—Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

"Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements—TrailerBrakes

• Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavea collision.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance.Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failureretodosocouldresultina collision.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

(Continued)

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!(Continued)

couldleadtoacceleratedbrakeliningwear,higher brakepedaleffort,andlongerstoppingdistances.

TowingRequirements—TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B[" "]
    C["5"] --> D[" "]
    E["4"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    B --> I[" "]
    D --> J[" "]
    F --> K[" "]
    H --> L[" "]
    I --> M["1"]
    J --> N["2"]

057003766
Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 7
    7 --> 1

057003765

Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission—IfEquipped

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.

NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

ElectronicSpeedControl—IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

AutoStick®

- When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "4" if

the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "3" or "2" if needed to maintain the desired speed.

- To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

CityDriving

When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

HighwayDriving

Reduce speed.

AirConditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TowingCondition	WheelsOFFThe Ground	ManualTransmissionAutomaticTransmission
Flat Tow None		• Transmission in NEU-TRAL• 65 mph (105 km/h) maximum speed	NOTALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front NotRecommendedNOTALLOWED
Rear NotRecommendedNotRecommended
On Trailer All OK	OK

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

AutomaticTransmission—IfEquipped

Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOTALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFFthe ground.

Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is NOTALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

ManualTransmission—IfEquipped

Vehicles with a manual transmission may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• There is no limitation on towing distance.

Manual transmission vehicles may also be towed using a vehicle trailer (with all four wheels off the ground).

Use of a towing dolly is not recommended, as vehicle damage may occur.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS....399

■IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS....399

■TREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED .....400

□TIREFIT Storage....401

☐TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .401

☐TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

□Sealing A Tire With TREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

■WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS....410

□Torque Specifications....4 1 1

■JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .412

□Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .....413

□Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

□Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

□Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

■JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES....421

□ Preparations For Jump-Start .....422

□Jump-Starting Procedure....423

■FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE....426

■SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE .....428

398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

■TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE....429

□Manual Transmission....432

□Automatic Transmission....431

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads240°F (116°C)orgreaterpulloverandstopthevehicle.Idle thevehiclewiththeairconditionerturnedoffuntil thepointerdropsbackintothenormalrange200-230°F(93-110°C).Ifthepointerremainsat240°F (116°C)orgreaterandyouhearachime,turnthe engineoffimmediatelyandcallforservice.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

TREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to 14 " (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4^ F (-20°C).

This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

TREFIT Storage

The TREFIT kit is located in the trunk.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with two circular fans and a directional arrow pointing to the top panel (no text or symbols on the fan itself)

TREFITLocation

TREFIT Kit Components And Operation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 060410595

TREFITComponents

1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of TREFIT Kit)

402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

UsingTheModeSelectKnobAndHoses

Your TREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.

SelectingAirMode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.

SelectingSealantMode

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position to inject the TIRE-FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this mode.

UsingThePowerButton

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the TREFIT kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TREFIT kit.

UsingTheDeflationButton

Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.

TREFIT Usage Precautions

- Replace the TREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to "Sealing a Tire with TREFIT" section (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement".

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with cables and a display panel (no visible text or symbols)

0604018634

TREFITExpirationDateLocation

• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the TREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403

the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.

• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 14'' (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the TREFIT kit by the hoses.

WARNING!

• Donotattempttosealatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosesttotraffic.Pullfarenoughoffthe roadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhenusing theTIREFITkit.
• DonotuseTREFITordrivethevehicleunderthe followingcircumstances:

-Ifthepunctureinthetiretreadisapproximately 1/4"(6mm)orlarger.
-Ifthetirehasanysidewalldamage.
-If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.
-If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
-Ifthewheelhasanydamage.
-If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• KeepTREFITawayfromopenflamesorheat source.
• AlooseTIREFITkitthrownforwardinacollision orhardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthe vehicle.AlwaysstowtheTIREFITkitintheplace provided.Failureretofollowthesewarningscan resultininjuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou, yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.
  • TakecarenottoallowthecontentsofTIREFITto comeincontactwithhair,eyes,orclothing.TIREFITisharmfulifinhaled,swallowed,orabsorbed throughtheskin.Itcausesskin,eye,andrespiratoryirritation.Flushimmediatelywithplentyof waterifthereisanycontactwitheyesorskin.

Changeclothingassoonaspossible,ifthereisany contactwithclothing.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- TIREFITSealantsolutioncontainslatex.Incaseof anallergicreactionorrash,consultaphysician immediately.KeepTIERFIToutofreachofchildren. Ifswallowed,rinsemouthimmediatelywithplenty ofwateranddrinkplentyofwater.Donotinduce vomiting!Consultaphysicianimmediately.

Sealing A Tire With TREFIT

(A)WheneverYouStopToUseTREFIT:

1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle's Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the TREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve stem and keep the TREFIT kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the

kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.

1. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
2. Set the parking brake.

(B)SettingUpToUseTREFIT:

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the TREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.

406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
2. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.

NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.

(C)InjectingTREFITSealantIntoTheDeflated Tire:

- Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE-FIT kit.

NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

- After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.

NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.

If thesealant(whitefluid) does not flow within 0 - 10 secondsthroughtheSealantHose(6):

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn On the TIREFIT kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TREFIT kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

If thesealant(whitefluid)doesflowthroughthe SealantHose(6):

1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tiredoes not in flat to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

- The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.

If the tireinflatest otherecommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TREFIT kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.

408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the TREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) "Drive Vehicle."

CAUTION!

• ThemetalendfittingfromPowerPlug(8)mayget hotafteruse,soitshouldbehandledcarefully.
• Failuretoreinstallthecaponthefittingattheend oftheSealantHose(6)canresultinsealantcontactingyourskin,clothing,andthevehicle'sinterior.Itcanalsoresultinsealantcontactinginternal TIREFITkitcomponentswhichmaycausepermanentdamagetothekit.

(D)DriveVehicle:

Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

WARNING!

TREFITisnotapermanentflattirerepair.Havethe tireinspectedandrepairedorreplacedafterusing TREFIT.Donotexceed55mph(90km/h)untilthe tireisrepairedorreplaced.Failureretofollowthis warningcanresultininjuriesthatareseriousorfatal toyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

(E)AfterDriving:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to "Whenever You Stop to Use TREFIT" before continuing.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).

Iftirepressureislessthan19psi(1.3Bar):

The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.

Ifthetirepressureis19psi(1.3Bar)orhigher:

1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TREFIT and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.
   NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the TREFIT kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the TREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center.

410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) "Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement".

NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TREFIT service kit.

(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:

1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly.

4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TREFIT housing.

5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.

6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the TREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

LugNut/BoltTorque**L	LugNut/ BoltSize	LugNut/ BoltSocket Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m) M	14 x 1.50 22 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Close-up of a mechanical component with concentric rings and a downward arrow indicating a feature (no text or symbols)

0605005441

WheelMountingSurface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> D["4"]
    D --> A

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 1
    5 --> 2
    5 --> 3
    5 --> 4

0605006372

TorquePatterns

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthe lugnuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. Ifyouneedtoget underaraisedvehicle, takeittoaservicecenter whereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly. Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes. Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire.

NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.

1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a mounted component with a white arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols visible)

OpeningTheAccessPanel

1. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.

414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a mechanical component with concentric rings and a central hub, marked by an arrow (no text or symbols)

SpareTireFastenerJackFastener

1. Remove the spare tire.

2. Remove the fastener securing the jack.

Interior view of a vehicle seatbelt assembly with visible brackets and mounting holes (no text or symbols)

1. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejack orchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

060505162

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking And Changing A Tire

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of these retire changing warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
• Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack. If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle, takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.

PRND3L P R

JackWarningLabel

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

Side view of a sedan with mounting feet and two close-up insets showing mechanical components (no text or symbols)

JackEngagementLocations

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.

NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.

418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a downward arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with a directional arrow and part number 060540942 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

FrontJackingLocationRearJackingLocation

1. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackand hurtsomeonearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenough toremovethetire.

1. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
2. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Besuretomountthesparetirewiththevalvestem facingoutward. Thevehiclecouldbedamagedifthe sparetireismountedincorrectly.

Close-up of hands adjusting a car tire with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

MountingSpareTire

060633619

420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE:

• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.

• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use, and operation.

• Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthe lugnuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
2. Refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section for proper lug nut torque.
3. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.Havethedeflated(flat)tire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthe lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

2. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.

3. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.

Technical diagram of an automotive engine compartment with labeled components and a vehicle identifier

RemoteBatteryPostsLocations

1 — Remote Positive (+)Post
2 — Remote Negative (-)Post

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.ItcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchisON.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
- Removeanymetaljewelrysuchasrings, watch bandsandbraceletsthatcouldmakeaninadvertent electricalcontact. Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.
- Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged due to battery explosion.

424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damageto the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

ConnectingTheJumperCables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthejumpercabletothenegative(-) postofthedischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalsparkcouldcausethebatterytoexplodeand couldresultinpersonalinjury. Onlyusethespecific groundpoint, donotuseanyotherexposedmetal parts.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

DisconnectingTheJumperCables

1. Disconnect the negative (-)end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriespluggedintothevehiclepoweroutlets drawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennot inuse(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenoughwithoutengineoperation, thevehicle'sbatterywilldischargesufficientlyto degradebatterylifeand/orpreventtheenginefrom starting.

426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmayleadto transmissionoverheatingandfailure.AllowtheenginetoidlewiththetransmissioninNEUTRALforat leastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motion cycles.Thiswillminimizeoverheatingandreduce theriskofclutchortransmissionfailureduring prolongedeffortstofreeastuckvehicle.

NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

CAUTION!

• When "rocking" astuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRSTGEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), donot spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthewheels above30mph(48km/h)whileingear(notransmissionshiftingoccurring).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and donot let any one near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the shift lever override access cover (located to the right of the shift lever).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever down.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a hand operating the shaft (no text or symbols visible)

ShiftLeverOverrideAccessCover

1. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
3. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.

TowingConditionWheels	OFFThe Ground	AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION	MANUALTRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE Iftransmissionisoper-		able:•Transmission in NEU-TRAL•30 mph (48 km/h) max speed•15 miles (24 km) max distance	Iftransmissionisoper-able:•Transmission in NEU-TRAL•65 mph (105 km/h) maxspeed
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Front NOTALLOWEDNOT RECOMMENDED
Flatbed ALLBEST METHODBESTMETHOD

430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseslingtypeequipmentwhentowing. Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck, donot attachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimproper towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend to this vehicle using atowdolly. Vehicledamagemay occur.

Automatic Transmission

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
- The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
- The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery is discharged, see "Shift Lever Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Manual Transmission

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
- The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
- There is no limitation on towing distance.

If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .436

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .438

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap....438

■EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS....439

■REPLACEMENT PARTS....440

■DEALER SERVICE....440

■MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES....441

□Engine Oil. 442

□Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

□Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

□Maintenance-Free Battery .....447

□Air Conditioner Maintenance .....448

□Body Lubrication....452

□Windshield Wiper Blades....452

□Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

□Exhaust System....453

□Cooling System....456

□Brake System....462

434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

□Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission (If Equipped). 465
□Manual Transmission — If Equipped .....465
□Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .466
□Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion....468

■FUSES....474

□Integrated Power Module....475
□Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478

■VEHICLE STORAGE....484
■REPLACEMENT BULBS....484
■BULB REPLACEMENT....485

□Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
□Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .485
□Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
□Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
□Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
□Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .489
□License Lamp....489

■FLUID CAPACITIES....491

■ FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .492

□Engine....492

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435

□Chassis....494

436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

Labeled diagram of a car engine bay with numbered parts for identification

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill 3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Post)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

Diagram of car engine compartment with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating assembly or movement

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 6 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

- ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddriveability. Thevehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.

- If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediately service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer or a "Check Gascap" message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the

Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

2. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

3. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only doservicework for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

- Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizeddealerorqualified repaircenter.

(Continued)

442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurabilityofyour vehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenanceintervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthesecomponentsasthechemicalscandamageyourengine, transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning. SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicle LimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneededbecauseof componentmalfunction,useonlythespecified fluidfortheflushingprocedure.

Engine Oil

CheckingOilLevel—3.6LEngine

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingwillcauseoilaerationor lossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamageyourengine.

CheckingOilLevel—5.7LEngine

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the "SAFE" range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the "SAFE" range will result in an oil level at the top of the "SAFE" range on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingwillcauseoilaerationor lossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamageyourengine.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE FOR GASOLINE ENGINES CERTIFIED

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity—3.6LEngine

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the "Engine Compartment" illustration in this section.

NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

EngineOilViscosity—5.7LEngine

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to "Fuel Saver Technology – If Equipped" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

MaterialsAddedToEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) removed. Failure to dosocan result in serious personal injury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to "Jump-Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and internal components with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

BatteryLocation

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluid tocontactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotlean overabatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacid splashesineyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywithlargeamountsofwater.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Washhands after handling.
• Thebatteryinthisvehiclehasaventhosethat shouldnotbedisconnectedandshouldonlybe replacedwithabatteryofthesametype(vented).

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and then negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamp should be ignition on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the chargerto the battery. Donot use a "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancausethe systemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, ordamageto the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobedisconnected should bed one by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

A/CAirFilter

The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.

1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips.

Close-up of a car's engine compartment showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

AccessDoor

1. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451

Hand inserting a card into a car's vent, with an upward arrow indicating the next card (no text or symbols on the card itself)

FilterAccessCoverA/CAirFilter

Close-up of a car engine bay with a white arrow pointing to a component, no visible text or symbols

1. Remove the used filter.

2. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).

3. Close the filter access cover.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

- Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

- The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.

(Continued)

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction,particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetothecverterand vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.

- Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

- When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-GoTM). The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position for Keyless Enter-N-GoTM).

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashad timetocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystem pressurecapwhentheradiatorishot.

CoolantChecks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—DrainFlushAndRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection. OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolantisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,thecoolingsystemwill needtobedrained,flushed,andrefilledwithfresh OATcoolant(conformingtoMS-12106),byan authorizeddealerassoonaspossible.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeradiatorenginecoolantand mayplugtheradiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70% ) if temperatures below -34^ (-37^) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words "DONOTOPENHOT" on the cooling system pressure cap areas safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Donot loosenor remove the captocoolan overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, donot remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingor ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

MasterCylinder—BrakeFluidLevelCheck

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.

Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the "MAX" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in at nightly closed container. Keep them master cylinder reservoir to secure data all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in al lower boiling point. This may cause it to oil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
  • Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire.Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces,careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminate thebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscouldbe damaged,causingpartialorcompletebrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission (If Equipped)

The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

FluidLevelCheck

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration intransmissionshiftqualityand/ordamagetothe transmission. Referto"Fluids,Lubricants,and GenuineParts"inthissectionforfluidspecifications.

ChangeTransmissionFluid

If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

SelectionOfLubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration intransmissionshiftqualityand/ororqueconverter shudder,andwillrequiremorerefrequentfluidand filterchanges.Referto"Fluids,Lubricants,and GenuineParts"inthissectionforfluidspecifica-tions.

SpecialAdditives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission.

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid

leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467

transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visityourauthorizeddealerimmediately.Severetransmissiondamagemayoccur.Yourauthorizeddealerhastheproper toolstoadjustthefluidlevelaccurately.

FluidAndFilterChanges

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Axle

FluidLevelCheck

Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

ChangeAxleFluid

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

ProtectionOfBodyAndPaintFromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
  • Stone and gravel impact.
  • Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

- Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowderthatwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi(8274 kPa)canresultindamageorremovalofpaintand decals.

470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

- If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

- If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

- Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelAndWheelTrimCare

• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, ormetalpolishes.Donotuseovencleaner.These productsmaydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish. Avoidautomaticcarwashesthatuseacidicsolutions orharshbrushesthatmaydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.OnlyMOPAR®WheelCleaneror equivalentisrecommended.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

CAUTION!

DonotuseAlcoholandAlcohol-basedand/orKeton basedcleaningproductstocleanleatherseats,as damagetheseatmayresult.

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

CleaningTheCenterConsoleCupholders

Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console.

NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.

FUSES

WARNING!

- Whenreplacingablownfuse,alwaysuseanappropriatereplacementfusewiththesameamp ratingastheoriginalfuse.Neverreplacefuse withanotherfuseofhigheramprating.Never replaceablownfusewithmetalwiresoranyother material.Failuretouseproperfusesmayresultin seriouspersonalinjury,fireand/orpropertydamage.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Beforereplacingafuse, makesurethattheignition isoffandthatalltheotherservicesareswitchedoff and/ordisengaged.
• Ifthereplacedfuseblowsagain,contactanaauthorizeddealer.
• Ifageneralprotectionfuseforsafetysystems(air bagsystem,brakingsystem),powerunitsystems (enginesystem,gearboxsystem)orsteeringsystem blows,contactanauthorizeddealer.

Integrated Power Module

The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.

Close-up of a car engine bay with an arrow pointing to the internal component (no visible text or symbols)

IntegratedPowerModule

CAUTION!

•Wheninstallingtheintegratedpowermodule cover,itisimportanttoensurethecoverisproperly positionedandfullylatched.Failuretodosomay allowwatertogetintotheintegratedpowermod-uleandpossiblyresultinanelectricalsystem failure.

CAUTION!(Continued)

•Whenreplacingablownfuse,itisimportanttouse onlyafusehavingthecorrectamperagerating.The useofafusewitharatingotherthanindicatedmay resultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.If aproperlyratedfusecontinuestoblow,itindicates aproveminthecircuitthatmustbecorrected.

(Continued)

CavityCartridge	FuseMini-FuseDescription
1 — 15 Amp	Blue Washer Motor
2 —	25 Amp Natural	Powertrain Control	Module (PCM)/NGS Module Feed (Batt)
3 —	25 Amp Natural	Ignition	Run/Start
4 —	25 Amp Natural	EGR Solenoid/Alternator
5 — 15 Amp	Blue Powertrain Control Module
6 — 25 Amp	Natural Ignition Coils/Injectors
7 — 25 Amp	Natural Headlamp Washer Relay – If Equipped
8 — 30 Amp	Green Starter
9	—	—	—
10 30 Amp Pink —		Windshield Wiper
11	30 Amp Pink — Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves
12	40 Amp Green —	Radiator Fan Lo/High
13	50 Amp Red —		Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor
14	—	—	—
15	50 Amp Red —		Radiator Fan
16	—	—	—
17	—	—	—
18	—	—	—
19	—	—	—
20	—	—	—

478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CavityCartridge	FuseMini-FuseDescription
21 — — —
22 — — —

Rear Power Distribution Center

There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays.

Interior view of a vehicle's electrical enclosure with visible wiring and components, no text or symbols present

RearPowerDistributionCenter

CAUTION!

- Wheninstallingthepowerdistributioncenter cover,itisimportanttoensurethecoverisproperly positionedandfullylatched.Failuretodosomay allowwatertogetintothepowerdistribution centerandpossiblyresultinanelectricalsystem failure.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Whenreplacingablownfuse,itisimportanttouse onlyafusehavingthecorrectamperagerating.The useofafusewitharatingotherthanindicatedmay resultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.If aproperlyratedfusecontinuestoblow,itindicates aprobleminthecircuitthatmustbecorrected.

(Continued)

CavityCartridgeFuseMini-FuseDescription
1 60 Amp Yellow — Ignition Off Draw (IOD)			Cavity1oftheRearPowerDistribution CentercontainsablackIODfuseneeded forvehicleprocessingduringassembly. Theservicereplacementpartisa60Amp yellowcartridgefuse.
2	40 Amp Green	—	Integrated Power Module (IPM)
3	—	—	—
4 40 Amp Green — Integrated Power Module (IPM)
5 30 Amp Pink — Heated Seats – If Equipped
6 — 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
7 —	15 Amp Blue	Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
8 —	15 Amp Blue	Diagnostic Link	Connector (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
9 — 20 Amp Yellow		Power Outlet
10	—	25 Amp Natural	Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
11 *	—	—	—
12 *	—	—	—
13 *	—	—	—
14	—	10 Amp Red	AC Heater Control/Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped
CavityCartridge	FuseMini-FuseDescription
15 — 20 Amp	Yellow Active Damper – If Equipped
16 — 20 Amp	Yellow Heated Seat Module – If Equipped
17 — 20 Amp	Yellow Instrument Cluster
18 — 20 Amp	Yellow Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel)
19 — 10 Amp	Red Stop Lights
20 — — —
21 — — —
22 — — —
23 — — —
24 — — —
25 — — —
26 — — —
27 — 10 Amp	Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
28 —	15 Amp Blue	Ignition Run, AC Heater Control/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
29 — 5 Amp	Tan Cluster/Electronic	Stability Control (ESC)/	Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP LIGHT Switch
30 — 10 Amp	Red Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering		Control Module (SCM)
31 — — —
32 — — —
33 — — —
34 — — —
35 — 5 Amp	Tan Antenna Module –	If Equipped/Power	Mirrors
36 — 25 Amp	Natural Hands-Free Phone –	If Equipped/Radio/Amplifier Feed
37 —	15 Amp Blue	Transmission
38 — 10 Amp	Red Cargo Light/Vehicle Information	Module– If Equipped
39 — 10 Amp	Red Heated Mirrors –	If Equipped
40 — 5 Amp	Orange Auto Inside Rearview Mirror/Heated		Seats – If Equipped/Switch Bank
41 — — —
42 30 Amp Pink — Front Blower Motor
43 30 Amp Pink — Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp Blue —		Amplifier/Sunroof – If Equipped

*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window switch, and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you
experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.

484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

Interior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps	W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp	562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps	578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped	194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE1	4140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder	LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)	D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Halogen Headlamp H13
Front Park/Turn Lamp 3157A
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker 168
Tail Lamp 3057K
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp 3057K
Rear Side Marker 168
Backup Lamp 921
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License 168

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped

See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.

Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped

HIDHeadlamps

The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Becauseof

486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

this,youshouldnotattempttoserviceaheadlampbulb yourself.Ifaheadlampbulbfails,takeyourvehicleto anauthorizeddealerforservice.

WARNING!

Atransienthighvoltageoccursatthebulbsocketsof HIDheadlampswhentheheadlampswitchisturned ON.Itmaycauseseriselectricalshockorelectrocutionifnotservicedproperly.Seeyourauthorized dealerforservice.

NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps, when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.

Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp

1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard side to disengage the clip.

NOTE: If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint.

1. Rotate the bulb's socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
3. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
4. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.

Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp

1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a feature, no visible text or symbols

TailLampRetainer

1. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly.

Diagram of a car door handle with two arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

073305340
TailLampFasteners

1. Pull back the trunk liner.
2. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the tail lamp assembly.
3. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs.

488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle being adjusted, with a hand pointing to the component (no text or symbols visible)

RemovingTailLampAssembly

1. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.

4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb.

5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.

6. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner.

7. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

ReinstallTailLampRetainer

1. Close the trunk.

Center Tail/Backup Lamp

See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.

License Lamp

1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia.

2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.

3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb.

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Technical diagram showing hand operating a device with labeled parts 1 and 2, including a numbered annotation.

SocketAssembly

1 — License Lamp Bulb

2 — Socket

1. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.

2. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install the screws.

FLUID CAPACITIES

	U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)
All Engines 19 Gallons 72 Liters
EngineOilWithFilter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
CoolingSystem*
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	11.1 Quarts 10.5	Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	14.7 Quarts 13.9	Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you	use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend	you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine We recommend	you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Fuel Selection (3.6L and 5.7L Engine – Automatic Transmission)	87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine – Manual Transmission) 91	Octane

494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Manual Transmission – If Equipped	We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped	Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
Rear Axle – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140 (API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5) with MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■ MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .....496 □ Maintenance Chart.....498

496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, "Oil Change Required" will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.

SevereDutyAllModels

Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty

OnceAMonthOrBeforeALongTrip:

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Change oil and filter

•Rotate the tires. Rotateatthefirstsignofirregular wear,evenifitoccursbeforeyournextscheduledservice

•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses

•Inspect exhaust system

•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance Chart

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Additional Inspections
InspecttheCVjoints.XXXXX
Inspectfrontsuspension,tierod ends,bootsealsandreplaceif necessary.	X		X		X		X		X		X		X
Inspect the rear axle fluid.	X				X				X				X
Inspectthemanualtransmission fluid(ifequipped),addasnecessary.	X				X				X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
499

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Inspectthebrakelinings,replace asnecessary.	X		X		X			X			X
Adjustparkbrakeonvehicles equippedwithfourwheeldisc brakes.	X		X		X			X			X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.		X			X			X			X			X
Replacecabin/airconditioning filter.	X		X		X			X			X
Replacesparkplugs(3.6L engine).**									X

500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Replacesparkplugs(5.7Lengine).**									X
Flushandreplacetheengine coolantat10yearsor150,000 miles(240,000km)whichever comesfirst.									X					X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7	8 9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Changethemanualtransmission fluid(ifequipped)ifusingyour vehicleforanyofthefollowing: Mostofyourdrivingisatsus-tainedspeedsduringhot weather,above90°F(32°C), drivingindustryconditions,or stopandgodriving.			X				X				X
Changetheautomatictransmis-sionfluidandfilterifusingyour vehicleforanyofthefollowing: police,taxi,fleet,orfrequent trailertowing.					X

502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7	8 9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilter.											X
Changetherearaxlefluidifus-ingyourvehicleforanyofthe following:police,taxi,fleet,off-road,orfrequenttrailertowing.			X				X				X
InspectandreplacePCVvalveif necessary.									X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyourvehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunctionandeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE....507

□Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

□Prepare A List....507

□Be Reasonable With Requests....507

■IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE....507

□Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .508

□Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center .....508

□In Mexico Contact:....509

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

□Service Contract....509

■WARRANTY INFORMATION....510

■MOPAR®PARTS....511

■REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS....5 11

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

□ In Canada. .511

■PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .....512

506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

■DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES....513

□Treadwear....513

□Traction Grades....513

□Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the

508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

In Mexico Contact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR® PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)....324

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .....458

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Airbag. 5

Airbag Deployment....6

Airbag Light 6

Airbag Maintenance....7

Airbag, Side 6

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) 6

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .446

Air Conditioner Maintenance....448

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .....284

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .....448

Air Conditioning System....276

Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Alarm

Arm The System 20

Alarm Light....218

Alarm, Panic 27

Alarm (Security Alarm)....19

Alarm System (Security Alarm)....19

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..... 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....457

Disposal. 460

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....324

Anti-Lock Warning Light....219

Appearance Care....468

Arming System (Security Alarm)....19

Assistance Towing. 127

Auto Down Power Windows 4 2

Automatic Dimming Mirror....109

Automatic Door Locks 35

Automatic Headlights....162

INDEX 517

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....276

Automatic Transmission....306

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Autostick....314

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Fluid Type....494

Special Additives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Autostick....314

Auto Unlock, Doors 35

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Battery....447

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 8

Location 447

Belts, Seat 49

Body Mechanism Lubrication .....452

B-Pillar Location....343

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Brake Control System, Electronic .....327

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Brakes....324

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Anti-Lock (ABS)....324

Fluid Check....463

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

Parking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Brake/Transmission Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 9 6

Brightness, Interior Lights .....167

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Bulbs, Light....101

Calibration, Compass .....232

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Caps, Filler Fuel....376 Oil (Engine)....445 Radiator (Coolant Pressure)....460

Carbon Monoxide Warning....9

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) .....379

Car Washes....469

Cellular Phone .276

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Certification Label. .379

Chains, Tire .359

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .439

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..... 9

Checks, Safety 9

Child Restraint....7

Child Restraints

Child Seat Installation 92

Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint ..... 8 7

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt 89

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . 8 1

Clean Air Gasoline....373

Cleaning Wheels....470

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Clock. .241

Cold Weather Operation....296

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .....275

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Compass....231

Compass Calibration....232

Compass Variance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Connector

U C I....265

INDEX 519

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .....265
Conserving Fuel....227
Console....202
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Console, Overhead ..... 184
Contract, Service .509
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....460
Cooling System. 456
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .....458
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Coolant Level....456
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Drain, Flush, and Refill .....457
Inspection....461
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Radiator Cap....460
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....457
Corrosion Protection....468

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Cupholders....201

Customer Assistance .....507

Data Recorder, Event 72

Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Daytime Running Lights .....163

Dealer Service. 440

Deck Lid, Emergency Release .....44

Deck Lid, Power Release....43

Defroster, Rear Window....203

Defroster, Windshield 99

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .....169

Diagnostic System, Onboard .....438

Dimmer Switch, Headlight. 166

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) 442

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....460

Door Locks

Door Locks 3 3

Key Fob....

Remote 3 3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 3 3

Door Locks, Automatic 35

Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water....317

Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .227

Electrical Power Outlets. 197

Electric Remote Mirrors 1 1 1

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....478

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....172

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....331

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . 2 1 1

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .....221

Emergency Deck Lid Release 4 4

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck....426

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Jacking....412

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Overheating.399

Towing 429

Emergency Trunk Release .....44

Emission Control System Maintenance .....439

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Air Cleaner 446

Block Heater 299

Break-In Recommendations....9 6

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Compartment 436

INDEX 521

Compartment Identification .....436

Coolant (Antifreeze)....456

Cooling....456

Exhaust Gas Caution 98

Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Flooded, Starting .....296

Fuel Requirements....371

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Oil 4

Oil Filler Cap....445

Oil Selection....443

Oil Synthetic....445

Overheating....399

Starting....290

Temperature Gauge....2 1 1Flashers

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Entry System, Illuminated ..... 2

Ethanol....373

Event Data Recorder....72

Exhaust Gas Caution. 98

Exhaust System 98

Exterior Folding Mirrors....1 1 0

Exterior Lighting. 161

Exterior Lights....101

Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Filters

Air Cleaner 446

Air Conditioning....283

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Flashers

Hazard Warning....399

Turn Signal .....101

Flash-To-Pass....166

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

522 INDEX

Fluid, Brake 494

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Fluid Leaks....101

Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission....467

Brake....463

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456

Engine Oil....442

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .....492

Fog Lights....164

Folding Rear Seat....157

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426

Fuel. .371

Adding....376

Additives....375

Clean Air. .373

Conserving....227

Ethanol....373

Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....376

Gasoline....371

Gauge....210

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Methanol....373

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Requirements....371

Saver Mode .227

Specifications....492

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491

Fueling....376

Fuel Optimizer....227

Fuel Saver....227

Fuel System Caution....377

Fuses. 474

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .....185

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)....376

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Gasoline (Fuel)....371

INDEX 523

Conserving....227 Hazard Warning Flasher....399
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Gauges Automatic....162 Coolant Temperature....2 1 1 Cleaning....472
Fuel....210 Delay....162
Odometer....215 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch....166
Speedometer....210 Lights On Reminder....164
Tachometer. 210 On With Wipers .162
Gear Ranges....307 Passing....166
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
General Information....28 Time Delay....162
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. 379 Head Restraints .155
GVWR....379 Head Rests....155
Heated Mirrors....1 1 2
Hazard Heated Seats. 152
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . 166

Hill Start Assist. 329

Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)....185

Hood Release....159

Interior Lights....167

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Introduction....4

iPod®/USB/MP3 Control

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio .....147

Ignition....1

Key....

Ignition Key Removal....1

Illuminated Entry 2

Immobilizer (Sentry Key)....1

Infant Restraint 7

Information Center, Vehicle .....221

Inside Rearview Mirror....108

Instrument Cluster .....209

Instrument Panel and Controls .....208

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....473

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) .....475

Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Jacking Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Jack Location....413

Jack Operation....412

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Key Fob

Arm The Alarm 20

Programming Additional Key Fobs ..... 1 9

Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 1 9

Key-In Reminder 16

Keyless Enter-N-Go 36

Keyless Entry System 23

Keyless Go. 12

INDEX 525

Key, Replacement....18

Keys....12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 17

Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Knee Bolster. 58

Lane Change and Turn Signals .....165

Lane Change Assist. 166

Lap/Shoulder Belts. 49

Latches....101

Hood....159

Lead Free Gasoline....371

Leaks, Fluid .....101

Life of Tires....357

Light Bulbs. 101

Lights....101

Airbag....66

Alarm....218

Anti-Lock....219

Automatic Headlights....162

Brake Assist Warning....335

Brake Warning 216

Bulb Replacement....485

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Courtesy/Reading 166

Cruise 210

Daytime Running....163

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....165

Electronic Throttle Control Warning .....211

Engine Temperature Warning .....213

Exterior....101

Fog 164

Hazard Warning Flasher .399

Headlights....161

Headlights On Reminder....164

Headlights On With Wipers .....162

Headlight Switch .....161

High Beam....166

526 INDEX

High Beam Indicator .....215

High Beam/Low Beam Select....166

Illuminated Entry 22

Instrument Cluster .....161

Intensity Control....167

Interior....167

License....489

Lights On Reminder....164

Low Fuel....220

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .....220

Map Reading....166

Oil Pressure....214

Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) .....168

Passing....166

Reading....166

Seat Belt Reminder....215

Security Alarm....218

Service....484

Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .220

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .....218

Traction Control....335

Turn Signal .....101

Vanity Mirror 11 2

Voltage....210

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....210

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Capacities....380

Tires 343

Locks 3 3

Automatic Door 35

Auto Unlock....3 5

Door 33

Power Door 34

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Lug Nuts....410

Maintenance Free Battery....447

INDEX 527

Maintenance Procedures .....441

Maintenance Schedule .....496

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .220

Manual, Service .512

Manual Transmission....299

Fluid Level Check....465

Map/Reading Lights....166

Master Cylinder (Brakes)....463

Methanol. .373

Mini-Trip Computer .....227

Mirrors....108

Automatic Dimming....109

Electric Powered 11

Electric Remote 1

Exterior Folding....1 1

Heated....1

Outside....1 1

Rearview....108

Vanity 1 1

Mode Fuel Saver....227

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System .....362

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

MTBE/ETBE....373

Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

New Vehicle Break-In Period 9 6

Occupant Restraints 45

Occupant Restraints (Sedan) 6 2

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .....371

Odometer....210

Trip....210

2Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Capacity 491

528 INDEX

Change Interval....443
Checking....442
Dipstick....442
Disposal....446
Filter....446
Filter Disposal....446
Identification Logo....444
Materials Added to....445
Recommendation....443
Synthetic....445
Viscosity....444
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Operating Precautions....438
Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ..... 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors....1 1 0
Overdrive. 313
Overdrive OFF Switch .....313
Overhead Console....184

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) 4
Paint Care 468
Panic Alarm 27
Parking Brake. 321
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Passing Light 166
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Pets. 96
Pets, Transporting....96
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .....344
Brakes....324
Deck Lid Release 43
Distribution Center (Fuses) .....478
Door Locks 34
Mirrors 1 11
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....197

Power

INDEX 529

Seats 150

Steering....319

Sunroof....193

Windows....4

Power Steering Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 5

Preparation for Jacking .....415

Pretensioners Seat Belts....5

Programmable Electronic Features .....234

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) ..23

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....460

Radio Operation....276

Radio Remote Controls .....274

Rear Cupholder....201

Rear ParkSense System....176

Rear Seat, Folding .....157

Rear Window Defroster .....203

Rear Window Features .....203

Recorder, Event Data 72

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Reformulated Gasoline....373

Refrigerant....449

Release, Hood. 159

Reminder, Lights On....164

Reminder, Seat Belt. 56

Remote Control

Starting System 29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 2 3

Arm The Alarm 20

Programming Additional Key Fobs .....19

Programming Additional Transmitters .....19

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .....274

Remote Starting System. 29

Remote Trunk Release. 43

Replacement Bulbs....484

Replacement Keys 18 Seat Belt Reminder 56

Replacement Parts. 440 Seat Belts. 45

Replacement Tires....358 And Pregnant Women....57

Reporting Safety Defects....5 1 1 Child Restraint....7 3

Restraint, Head. 155 Extender 58

Restraints, Child. 73 Front Seat 49

Restraints, Occupant 45 Inspection 99

Rocking Vehicle When Stuck....426 Operating Instructions ....50

Rotation, Tires .....361 Pretensioners .....5 6

Rear Seat 49

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 9 9 Reminder 215

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle....101 Untwisting Procedure....53

Safety Defects, Reporting 5 1 1Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Safety, Exhaust Gas. 98 Adjustment .149

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Safety Tips 97 Heated .152

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

INDEX 531

Seatback Release .....157

Tilting....150

Security Alarm....1

Arm The System 20

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information....19

Key Programming....19

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 17

Sentry Key Replacement....1

Service Assistance....507

Service Contract....509

Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .220

Service Manuals....512

Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Shifting....304

Automatic Transmission....304

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Shoulder Belts 49

Side Airbag 68

Side View Mirror Adjustment. 1 1 0

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters)....283

Signals, Turn .....101

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....359

Snow Tires 352

Sound System Kicker....272

Spare Tire. .354

Spark Plugs....492

Specifications Fuel (Gasoline)....492 Oil....492

Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Speedometer. 210

Starting....29 Automatic Transmission....291

532 INDEX

Cold Weather....296

Engine Fails to Start .....296

Remote 29

Starting and Operating .....290

Starting Procedures....290

Steering Column Controls....165

Column Lock....171

Power....319

Tilt Column....171

Wheel, Tilt .....171

Steering Wheel Audio Controls .....274

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .274

Storage....484

Storage, Vehicle. .282

Storing Your Vehicle....484

Stuck, Freeing. 426

Sunglasses Storage....185

Sun Roof ....193

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..... 5 8

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

System, Remote Starting ..... 2 9

Tachometer. .210

Telescoping Steering Column .....171

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .....276

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .....211

Tilt Steering Column....171

Time Delay, Headlight .....162

Tire and Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . . 343

TREFIT....400

Tire Markings....336

Ti res 101

Aging (Life of Tires) .....357

Air Pressure....348

Chains 359

Changing .412

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

INDEX 533

General Information....348

High Speed....351

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Jacking. 412

Life of Tires....357

Load Capacity....343

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....362

Pressure Warning Light....218

Quality Grading....513

Radial....351

Replacement....358

Rotation....361

Safety 336

Sizes 337

Snow Tires....352

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Spinning....356

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Tread Wear Indicators....356

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

To Open Hood .....159

Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

24-Hour Towing Assistance .....127

Disabled Vehicle....429

Guide....385

Recreational....393

Weight....385

Towing Assistance. 127

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Traction....316

Traction Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Cooling System Tips....392

Hitches. 384

Minimum Requirements....386

Tips.391

Trailer and Tongue Weight....385

INDEX

Wiring....390

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Trailer Weight. .385

Transfer Case Fluid 494

Transmission....466

Automatic....306

Fluid 466

Manual....299

Shifting....304

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .28

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 2 3

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Trip Odometer .....210

Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) 43

Trunk Release, Emergency 4

Trunk Release Remote Control 43

Turn Signals .....165

UCI Connector .....265

Uconnect® Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uconnect® 130 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode .....248

Operating Instructions CD Mode .....243

Operating Instructions Radio Mode .....240

Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio Playing MP3 Files....257

Uconnect® phone .....126

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .....513

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .265

Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) Programming HomeLink®....186

Unleaded Gasoline....371

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3

INDEX 535

Vanity Mirrors....1 1 2 Washer

Variance, Compass....232

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....6

Vehicle Loading....344

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....7

Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..... 19

Vehicle Storage....282

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Voice Command Commands....145

System Operation....143

Voice Recognition System (VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210

Warnings and Cautions. 6

Warranty Information....510

Adding Fluid 453

Washers, Windshield .....168

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Water Driving Through....317

Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Wind Buffeting. 42

Window Fogging....282

Windows 41

Power 41

Windshield Defroster 99

Windshield Washers....168

Fluid 453

Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Windshield Wipers....168

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Wipers, Intermittent .....169

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTINGEQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedintothisvehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradiofrequency signals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephoneequipmentmust beinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmust beobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as closetothe battery as possible. The negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be refused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedontheroofor therearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeusedinmounting antennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmayaffecttheaccuracy oroperationofthecompassonvehiclesssoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticalandrouted awayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Useonlyfully shieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthannormal mayrequirespecialprecautions.

All installation should be checked for possible interference between the communication equipment and the vehicle's electronics systems.

DODGE SERVICE

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS ^a

Chrysler Group LLC

140491-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.